2 of 846

Forward looking statements

This presentation contains forward-looking statements about, among other things, trend analyses and statements regarding future events, anticipated growth and industry prospects, and our strategies, expectation or plans regarding product releases and enhancements. The achievement or success of the matters covered by such forward-looking statements involves risks, uncertainties and assumptions. If any such risks or uncertainties materialize or if any of the assumptions prove incorrect, results or outcomes could differ materially from those expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. The risks and uncertainties referred to above include those factors discussed in Salesforce's reports filed from time to time with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including, but not limited to: our ability to meet the expectations of our customers; uncertainties regarding Al technologies and its integration into our product offerings; the effect of evolving domestic and foreign government regulations; regulatory developments and regulatory investigations involving us or affecting our industry; our ability to successfully introduce new services and product features, including related to AI and Agentforce; our ability to execute our business plans; the pace of change and innovation in enterprise cloud computing services; and our ability to maintain and enhance our brands.

Last updated: September 10, 2024

3 of 846

Table of Contents

Salesforce Overall

Customization

Security, Identity, and Privacy

Field Service & Scheduler

Energy & Utilities Cloud

Omnistudio

4 of 846

Salesforce Overall

5 of 846

Digital Wallet

6 of 846

Digital Wallet OOTB Consumption Insights by Tags

Customer Need

Customers want to be able to have more granular metrics and gain deeper understanding, on how credits are being consumed, beyond billing metrics.

Solution / How To Configure

Customers will have consumption insights reports and a dashboard, automatically installed in the org. They can access them from “consumption cards” page or in Data Cloud dashboards tab. Before 1st time running the report, users with the right permissions need to add the TenantEnrichedUsageEvent DLO to a desired Data Space.

Use Case

Customer wants to understand how many credits each Agent and Einstein feature is consuming credits for a given time period and environment.

Impact

Enable customers to gain deeper insights on consumption drivers via usage tags. For example consumption by agents, actions, and Data Cloud transforms. They will be able to evaluate the cost effectiveness and optimize for return on investment for consumption services.

Only available for Digital Wallet enabled products

7 of 846

Data Cloud Usage Tags

Slice and dice Data Cloud usage by Source and Data Space

Customer Need

Data Cloud usage events lack context, making it difficult to investigate spikes, tie consumption to specific resources, and perform internal cost attribution.

Solution / How To Configure

Users generate Data Cloud usage as normal. The resource causing the usage (e.g., Segment, Data Stream) and the Data Space where it occurred are automatically attached to each usage event. These dimensions are exposed in out-of-the-box reports.

Use Case

A Data Cloud admin notices a sudden spike in Segment usage. Using the enriched usage data, they identify the specific Segment responsible, then work to optimize their usage pattern.

Impact

Increased granularity for Data Cloud usage events

Data Cloud

Customers Only

Only available for Data Cloud customers

8 of 846

License Utilization

Customer Need

Lack of holistic view of the products purchased from Salesforce, how much has be used; and when should they buy more.

Solution / How To Configure

During the pilot, selected customers can access the new License Utilization Page from Digital Wallet App, as long as they have purchased force.com products. This page provides customers and sellers a list of purchased products. When gliding on each product, they can see the licenses that’s included, number of licenses provisioned, assigned to users, and remaining.

Use Case

Customers wants to understand what are the products they purchased from Salesforce, and the licenses that’s included in the product and the licence utilization so that they can make decisions on how to drive Salesforce product adoption, optimize and plan for their spending.

Impact

Provide a single pane of glass for all customers and sellers to have a shared, holistic view of their Salesforce footprint across the entire product portfolio

Customer who has �at least 1 force.com products

Pilot

9 of 846

Custom Tagging

Customer Need

Digital Wallet provide insights into the customer’s consumption, but customers also want the ability to analyze consumption data using their own defined custom tags, so that they can gain deeper, business-specific insights into their consumption and apply chargebacks as necessary.

Solution / How To Configure

During the pilot, selected customers can create and view custom tags in Digital Wallet, and then create reporting to analyze consumption with their unique business metrics provided by custom tags they have created.

Use Case

Which cost center used the most credits?

What type of processes and how many credits did the Sales Team used last quarter?

The IT Global department is managing the consumption for the company. How many credits each department consumed last year? (so I can charge back)

Impact

Provide granular (enhanced) usage visibility, accurate usage allocation to teams, projects, etc, better usage optimization, as well as budgeting and forecasting

Pilot

10 of 846

Data Detect

11 of 846

Data Detect

Precise sensitive data discovery at scale

Customer Need

Organizations using Salesforce face the challenge of identifying and managing sensitive data at scale to meet compliance requirements like GDPR, CCPA, and HIPAA. They need a way to proactively discover and classify sensitive data, such as PII and credit card numbers, which may be stored in unconventional locations, to confidently demonstrate compliance to auditors.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can create a policy by select from 21 out-of-the-box sensitive data types or create up to 10 custom patterns using regular expressions. To increase efficiency, users can also optionally exclude fields that have already been classified. After the scan is run, users are notified via email when the results are ready.

Use Case

A compliance officer can create a scan policy to identify sensitive data across their Salesforce org for regulatory adherence. After running the scan, they can view the results on an intuitive dashboard, which shows a summary of the sensitive data found by type and object. For detailed analysis or integration with other tools, the results can be exported as a CSV file or accessed via a SOQL query, enabling further reporting and action.

Impact

Admin efficiency for effortless compliance

Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions Only

12 of 846

Data Detect scans for Data Cloud

Precise sensitive data discovery at scale for Data Cloud

Customer Need

Organizations using Data Cloud face the challenge of identifying and managing sensitive data at scale to meet compliance requirements like GDPR, CCPA, and HIPAA. They need a way to proactively discover and classify sensitive data, such as PII and credit card numbers, which may be stored in unconventional locations, to confidently demonstrate compliance to auditors.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can create a policy by select from 21 out-of-the-box sensitive data types After the scan is run, users are notified via email when the results are ready.

Use Case

A compliance officer can create a scan policy to identify sensitive data across Data Cloud DLOs for regulatory adherence. After running the scan, they can view the results on an intuitive dashboard, which shows a summary of the sensitive data found by type and object. For detailed analysis or integration with other tools, the results can viewed in Data Cloud or accessed via a SOQL query, enabling further reporting and action.

Impact

Admin efficiency for effortless compliance on Data Cloud

Beta

Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions Only

14 of 846

On Demand Insights Generation

Trigger reports on demand, aligned to your sprint

Customer Need

Developers and architects needed more control over when ApexGuru insights are generated, especially to align with agile sprint cycles. Previously, insights were triggered with weekly cadence. This led to misalignment with development schedules and delayed performance reviews.

Solution / How To Configure

On-demand generation lets teams trigger ApexGuru insights when needed—enabling timely performance reviews. Users can generate up to 3 reports per week, view initiator details, see localized timestamps, and track progress via in-app notifications. Reports are downloadable once ready, all from the same interface.

Use Case

A development team working in 2-week sprints needs ApexGuru insights on Day 2 and Day 10 to catch issues early and before deployment. Using the on-demand trigger, they generate reports precisely when needed—enabling faster triage and optimization.

Impact

Enables timely, user-triggered insights aligned with sprint cycles—boosting agility and adoption by removing fixed-generation limits.

UE (Prod & Full copy Sandbox), and all Signature orgs

15 of 846

Test Case Quality Insights

Smarter, faster, and more reliable test classes for every release

Customer Need

Developers often write tests that meet the coverage requirement but fail to test real business logic. This results in fragile deployments, bloated code, and loss of trust in CI/CD pipelines.

Solution / How To Configure

The new Test Cases tab in ApexGuru scans test classes for anti-patterns, bad practices, and filler logic—delivering actionable insights in a familiar UI with severity levels and recommended fixes.

Use Case

Before a production push, a developer opens ApexGuru, scans key test classes, and discovers filler code and outdated syntax. With one review, the team boosts reliability and reduces maintenance debt.

Impact

Delivers meaningful test quality checks, prevents inflated coverage, and improves long-term code maintainability—all while aligning with Salesforce testing best practices.

UE (Prod & Full copy Sandbox), and all Signature orgs

16 of 846

Platform Cache Detection for SOQL

Detects missed caching opportunities that impact performance

Customer Need

Repeated SOQL queries in Apex logic create redundant processing and strain governor limits—especially in high-scale environments. Developers needed guidance on where caching can reduce database load.

Solution / How To Configure

ApexGuru now detects repeated SOQL queries that should be cached using Salesforce Platform Cache. It flags missed opportunities where semi-static data is queried without caching across triggers or entry points.This release adds detection of SOQL reuse patterns that should leverage Platform Cache, along with examples and links to Salesforce caching best practices.

Use Case

A dev team reviewing trigger logic sees repeated queries to a lookup object. ApexGuru highlights the missed use of Platform Cache, helping the team refactor the query and improve runtime efficiency.

Impact

Prevents unnecessary database load, reduces CPU time, and safeguards against SOQL limit breaches—especially in workflows involving frequently reused or semi-static reference data.

21 of 846

SOAP API login()

Customer Need

As part of our ongoing efforts to help our customers protect their Salesforce accounts in the current threat landscape, Salesforce is adopting a secure by default posture for authenticating external applications that requires the use of External Client Applications.

To support this change:

SOAP API login() in SOAP API versions 31.0-64.0 will be retired in the Summer ‘27 release.
SOAP API login() is not available in API versions 65.0 and onwards.

Solution / How To Configure

Users need to update all applications that use SOAP API login() to use External Client Applications.

Use Case

Any application using SOAP API login() to authenticate with a Salesforce org.

Impact

If applications using SOAP API login() are not upgraded by the retirement date, those applications will fail to authenticate, resulting in all subsequent API calls failing.

Retirement

22 of 846

Metadata API

23 of 846

New Metadata API Deploy States

Improved Handling of Post-Commit Stage With New States

Customer Need

Canceling a Metadata API Deploy after it has been committed but not finished can lead to a stuck MD deploy or metadata corruption

Solution / How To Configure

MD deploys can no longer be canceled from UI or API after they are committed. We've added two new deployment states (Finalizing Deploy and Finalizing Deploy Failed) to reflect this stage.

No configuration is needed to leverage this update.

Use Case

Once the deployment is committed, customers can see a clear transition of deployment status to the new status to know that the deployment cannot be canceled at this time.

Impact

Increased metadata integrity, reduced confusion around deployment stages and states and better support with enhanced logging and tooling for any deploy issues.

EE, DE, UE PxE

Editions

Available in Enterprise, Developer, Unlimited and Performance Editions

24 of 846

File Count Info in Metadata API Deployment Status UI Page

Two new fields in Deployment Status UI with visibility

Customer Need

Customization

32 of 846

SLDS 2 �UX Foundations

33 of 846

SLDS 2

The next-generation of Salesforce Lightning Design System

Customer Need

Customers need to maximize the ROI on their Salesforce products through customizing their experiences to tailor to their brand, unique business processes, and emerging needs like AI. SLDS 2 supports deeper, more flexible customization, while preserving Salesforce platform benefits and providing AI-ready interfaces - all while maintaining backwards compatibility to SLDS 1.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can enable SLDS 2 through Themes and Branding in Setup by activating any SLDS 2 theme

Use Case

Organizations looking to modernize their Salesforce experience can adopt SLDS 2 with the Salesforce Cosmos theme to instantly transform their interface, without costly custom development.

Impact

A modern experience with enhanced accessibility that improves user productivity through a streamlined UI. Additionally, SLDS 2 provides a path to powerful future capabilities like dark mode and advanced branding options - keeping orgs ahead of evolving user needs.

34 of 846

SLDS 2 - Visualforce Support

The next-generation of Salesforce Lightning Design System

Customer Need

Many of our customers still leverage Visualforce pages in their orgs. These customers require SLDS 2 support in Visualforce to ensure users experiences are visually consistent and not a patch-quilt of Lightning and Cosmos UI.

Solution / How To Configure

Follow these instructions to apply SLDS to Visualforce pages.
Go to Setup > User Interface > Enable Use SLDS 2 for pages that include <apex:slds> when an SLDS 2 theme is active�

Use Case

Customers that use a mix of Visualforce pages and the Lightning can now adopt SLDS 2 & Cosmos, while maintaining a consistent UI throughout their product

Impact

Customers that have Visualforce pages are unblocked from adopting SLDS 2

35 of 846

SLDS 2 - Themes and Branding

Brand your org with the new UI

Customer Need

Organizations want their workspaces to reflect their unique brand identity while benefiting from the improved usability of the modern, new UI design.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can access Themes and Branding in Setup to create custom themes for SLDS 2 or use the out-of-the-box Salesforce Cosmos theme.

Use Case

Admins can customize their Salesforce experience so their users can work in business tools give users a familiar, cohesive environment that reinforces company identity.

Impact

A modernized interface that combines your brand with enhanced accessibility, improved usability, and a fresh design system that delights users.

This is an Open Beta. Opt-in from Themes & Branding in Setup

36 of 846

SLDS 2 - User Density Preferences

Tailor your view with Comfy or Compact Mode

Customer Need

Density preferences control information density, enabling users to personalize their interface for optimal comfort and efficiency.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can toggle between Comfy or Compact mode under the user profile menu

Use Case

Customer Service reps that need to see more information on their screen at once can use compact mode to reduce white space and increase information density

Impact

Increase user productivity with personalization settings that optimize the workspace for their preferences

37 of 846

SLDS 2 - Dark Mode

Personalize your screen for improved visual comfort

Customer Need

Dark Mode addresses the critical accessibility needs of users with visual impairments and those prone to migraines, while also offering benefits like reduced eye strain in low light, potential battery savings, and a preferred aesthetic for many.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Dark Mode permission on an SLDS 2 Theme under Themes & Branding in Setup. Activate the theme.

Users can then toggle Color Mode under user profile menu

Use Case

Customer Service reps can use dark mode to minimize eye fatigue and enhance comfort, especially when spending extended hours interacting with screens.

Impact

Increase user productivity and enhance comfort. Dark mode can be used with any SLDS 2 theme and will maintain org brand styles.

Starter Base �Suite Edition

Beta

38 of 846

SLDS Linter

Analyzes code and smooths the transition to SLDS 2

Customer Need

Customers are excited to adopt the latest design system, SLDS 2, and they want to reduce the risk of visual regressions by ensuring their code is SLDS 2 compatible. SLDS Linter is the latest code analysis tool that enforces SLDS 2 styling best practices and helps smooth the transition to SLDS 2.

Solution / How To Configure�With just one Terminal command, developers can easily install and run SLDS Linter in seconds. SLDS Linter analyzes code against the built-in SLDS 2 rules engine, reports detailed findings, and suggests fixes to ensure compliance with SLDS 2 styling guidelines. Taking it one step further, SLDS Linter will also apply the suggested fixes in bulk across the repository, eliminating the need for repetitive, manual uplift.

Use Case

Customers and ISVs may have applied custom CSS to their org and want to understand the impact of their customizations on the transition to SLDS 2. SLDS Linter identifies CSS customizations that are not compatible with the new SLDS 2 styling architecture and reduces the uplift effort for these customized orgs.

Impact

Orgs with custom CSS will have a smoother transition to SLDS 2.

Available for all editions and made for any terminal. SLDS Linter can be installed via npm for free.

39 of 846

Event Monitoring

50 of 846

Real Time Events for Agents

Customer Need

Customers don’t have visibility into what data an agent accesses during task execution, making it difficult to monitor, reconfigure, or apply governance controls over agent-driven data access. Security and compliance teams need a way to track when and how AI agents are pulling data, and to enforce policies in real time.

Solution / How To Configure

With the new agent context fields included in API and Report Real-Time Events, customers gain visibility into agent activity. These enriched events can be used to build Transaction Security Policies (TSPs) that alert or block actions performed by agents.

Use Case

An admin creates a TSP on API Events. If an agent tries to query thousands of account records outside normal hours, the policy automatically blocks the action, sends an alert to the InfoSec team, and logs the attempt for auditing.

Impact

Provides customers with visibility into AI agent activity and data access. Organizations can actively govern agent-driven activity, reduce risk of unauthorized data use, and enforce compliance requirements in real time.

Available With Event Monitoring License in UE, EE, PxE, DE

51 of 846

Event Monitoring Dashboards

New CRMA Dashboards

Customer Need

Customers need to conduct security investigations, scope assessments, view org performance and adoption easily.

Solution / How To Configure

Customers need to create a new CRMA templated app called “Event Monitoring Dashboards”.

Use Case

As an admin, I want to conduct a scope assessment after a security incident to understand the breadth of a security incident.

As a developer, I want to view errors on Salesforce platform in a consolidated place so that I can understand the overall health of my org.

As a product owner, I want to understand how users are using my apps so that I can improve adoption of Salesforce.

Impact

Ease of use of the product for security, APM & adoption.

Available With Event Monitoring License in UE, EE, PxE, DE

Beta

52 of 846

Identify Agent Data Access with Event Log Objects & Event Log Files

Agent context added to logs

Customer Need

Customers want to know what data an agent is accessing for security and compliance.

Solution / How To Configure

BotId, BotSessionId, and PlannerId fields have been added to Rest API Event, API Total Usage Event, Unique Query Event, Invocable Action Event, Flow Execution Event, Apex Execution Event, and Apex Callout Event.

Use Case

As an auditor, I want to know how agents are interacting with sensitive data so that I can see if users or agents are accessing data that they shouldn’t

Impact

This will build trust in agentforce, allowing customers to observe exactly what data Agents are accessing.

Available With Event Monitoring License in UE, EE, PxE, DE

53 of 846

Shield App

54 of 846

Shield App

The New Shield Experience*

Customer Need

Customers lack a unified way to access all Shield capabilities - Data Detect, Field Audit Trail, Platform Encryption, and Event Monitoring - leading to an inconsistent experience and the potential for some features to be overlooked.

Solution / How To Configure

Go to the new Shield app to find a unified application for all Shield products. The app provides resources, easy navigation, and access to Data Detect and the newly integrated Field History Explorer from Own.

Use Case

An admin needs to review the field history for a record. Navigating to the Shield app, the admin can quickly go to Field History Explorer and realizes on review that they need to track additional fields. The admin navigates to Field History Tracking from within the new Shield experience to update tracking.

Impact

Customers can fully leverage each Shield product to strengthen their organization's security.

*Available with the Shield Suite, Field Audit Trail, Platform Encryption or

Event Monitoring License in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions

55 of 846

Shield Platform Encryption

56 of 846

Database Encryption (DBE)

Transparently Encrypt Your Entire Database (known as TLE in pilot)

Customer Need

30,000+ IdeaExchange points requesting that we:

Add a layer of encryption to more data including all standard & custom fields
Include support for advanced options including BYOK (Bring your own key)
Have a transparent option so there’s no impact to end users

Solution / How To Configure

Configure in one click via setup (screenshot below), see Setup DBE for details. NOTE: requires a Shield PE license and (2) that the feature be deployed to your Hyperforce instance (reach out to Shield Platform Encryption PM for details)

Use Case

Meet security & compliance requirements without impacting functionality

30,000+ IdeaExchange points

57 of 846

Encrypt Tableau Next Personal Orgs

Encrypt (& decrypt) Tableau Next with Shield Keys

Customer Need

Customers needs the same extra layers of encryption and advanced encryption options that they have for Data Cloud and core including EKM (external key management) and search index encryption.

Solution / How To Configure

Since Tableau Next runs on Data Cloud, follow these steps to turn on Platform Encryption for Data Cloud

Requires Shield Platform Encryption for Consumption license

Use Case

Meet security & compliance requirements without impacting functionality. Includes features like EKM (external key management) or the default encryption via Salesforce Shield keys.

* Requires Shield Platform Encryption for Consumption license

Beta

59 of 846

Salesforce

Mobile App &

Mobile App Plus

60 of 846

Tableau Next Mobile Experience

Data analysis and action on the go

Customer Need

Monitor the health of your business and take action on data insights. Augment the performance of metrics that you own through data insights.

Solution / How To Configure

Comes with Tableau Next licenses: web permissions need to be configured. Afterwards, add Tableau as a navigation item/tab for the mobile app under “App Manager” in setup. Re-order tabs such that Tableau is in the top 4.

Use Case

All users across functions — sales, service, marketing, IT, etc. — who is responsible for monitoring and/or moving a metric.

Impact

Monitor a set of metrics that are personalized to them: this serves as the foundation for proactive and agent driven action on Salesforce

61 of 846

Use your email to login to salesforce

Customer Need

Users of the salesforce mobile app are required to remember the name of their mydomain and then change their server to that domain before login. This introduces a barrier to using the app.

Solution / How To Configure

All users of the Salesforce Mobile App can change server to welcome.salesforce.com and use their email to choose from a list of their available domains to login.

Use Case

All users across functions — sales, service, marketing, IT, etc. — who accesses Salesforce through the Salesforce Mobile App

Impact

Users can now login with just their email address and will never have to remember their org domains to switch to.

62 of 846

QR Code Login

Use your browser login to salesforce mobile app

Customer Need

Users of the salesforce mobile app are required to remember the name of their mydomain and then change their server to that domain before login. This feature introduces a way to generate a QR Code from when you are already logged in session from browser and scan it on the phone to login without remembering domain, username or password.

Solution / How To Configure

If you logged into a Salesforce org on your browser, then click on the user avatar on the top right hand of the screen and click on the Mobile Login. The choose iOS or Android and generate a QR Code login. Scan within 60 seconds to login on your mobile device with the Salesforce Mobile App previously installed.

Use Case

All users across functions — sales, service, marketing, IT, etc. — who accesses Salesforce and want access to the Salesforce Mobile App

Impact

Already logged in on desktop? Generate a QR code then scan it: it will log you in immediately. Reducing the biggest barrier of entry to logging into the Salesforce Mobile App. Blaze through mobile login complexities: SSO, manual URL input.

63 of 846

Mobile Platform

64 of 846

Mobile SDK 13.1

New minor release with login

Customer Need

Customers who have built custom mobile apps using our Salesforce Mobile SDK can now adopt the latest Salesforce innovations including authentication improvements

Solution / How To Configure

Mobile SDK 13.1 is a minor release that features support for the email-based welcome.salesforce.com login, Websockets connectivity and modern async/await patterns in Swift.

Mobile SDK 13.1 also supports React Native 0.79 as well as Android 16.

Use Case

Customers who have built custom mobile apps using the Salesforce Mobile SDK 13.1.

Impact

Enables customers’ custom mobile apps to move to the latest authentication features, supports the latest Android version and allows React Native customers to upgrade to the latest supported React Native version.

New Android Login UX

65 of 846

Salesforce Flow

67 of 846

Flow Generation V2

More Accurate Flow Generation with Natural Language Prompts

Customer Need

Admins need to automate business processes with accurate and effective flows using natural language to save time and reduce manual creation efforts. Using natural language as the medium for creation helps new admins, for whom the learning curve for flow can be steep, and experienced admins who also invest considerable time in building and troubleshooting flows.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can create a flow in Flow Builder, and in the “Let Einstein Help You Build section,” then click “Get Started.” They can then enter their prompt and then click “Draft with Einstein Next Generation (Beta).”

Use Case

Admins enter a natural language prompt, and Einstein quickly generates a flow on-screen. Einstein can create flows with custom and standard objects and fields.

Impact

Admin productivity, faster time to value.

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

Beta

68 of 846

Builder Experience Enhancements

69 of 846

Faster, Smarter Resource Selection

Find the resources faster with pinned items, smart filtering, and expanded search

Customer Need

Flow builders waste time scrolling through long lists and drilling into nested resources. This slows down building and increases mistakes.

Solution / How To Configure

Quick resources: Most relevant items automatically appear at the top of the menu (e.g., triggering record in record-triggered flows)
Smarter filtering: Only valid resources and compatible data types are shown based on flow context
Expanded search (Now GA): Quickly locate deeply nested resources with search, API name, and parent path details

When Invocable Apex Actions have a large number of inputs, the default alphabetical sorting into a single flat list of inputs can make configuration confusing and inefficient for Admins, leading to misconfiguration, errors, and time spent troubleshooting

Solution / How To Configure

Action Developers can now specify how to present their action's inputs in Flow Builder with the new InvocableActionExtension metadata file. They’ll be able to set the sort order of the inputs, place inputs into groups, and apply conditional visibility.

Use Case

Any Apex Action Developer can begin using this with any of their Apex actions that accept multiple inputs to improve the experience of Admins that use their action. Packaging is fully supported.

Impact

Improve the usability of Invocable Apex Actions, leading to fewer errors and quicker time-to-value for Admins building Flows

All Editions

74 of 846

Transaction Control for All

Configure Actions to run in a new transaction in more Flow Types

Customer Need

Actions that make a callout cannot run if the same transaction has previously made a database change, like a Create, Update, or Delete. Actions in Screen Flows have the capability to run in a new transaction, but this option hasn’t been available in non-Screen Flows.

Solution / How To Configure

Any Flow Type that supports a Wait element can now be run in a new transaction if it makes a callout and there had been a database change before it ran. Just like with the Transaction Control in Screen Flows, Salesforce will automatically decide if this needs to happen, while giving Admins the ability to optionally always run in a new transaction or always continue in the same transaction.

Use Case

If a process needs to update a Contact record then send a callout to an external system, use Transaction Control to put both of those actions into a single Flow instead of needing to carefully orchestrate separate transactions.

Impact

Use Actions with Callouts more easily in more circumstances in more Flow Types with fewer errors

All Editions

75 of 846

Screen Flows

LWC Local Actions

Execute Lightning Web Runtime-ready browser actions in screen flows

Customer Need

Aura-based Local actions that trigger toast messages and navigate users to records need to be compatible with LWR

Solution / How To Configure

Developer doc link coming soon

Use Case

Trigger a toast message after a user creates a record in a screen flow
Open a newly created record in a new tab
Show confetti after a user completes a step in their flow

All Editions

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

80 of 846

Display Apex-Defined Data Types in DataTable

Scale DataTable to support more use-cases

Customer Need

Users want to add External Data (driven by Apex Defined Type) to DataTable

Solution / How To Configure

Identify a collection of Apex - Defined type records as the source data for DataTable. Add a Screen element and then add a DataTable component to it. In the Source Collection field, select the Apex action’s

output created earlier in the flow. Next, under Configure Rows, select a field in Unique Identifier. Use a field from your collection where every record has a distinct value, such as a record ID or a unique API name. Save and run the flow

Use Case

As a system integrator building a flow, i want to display the results of an HTTP callout or integration in a selectable table so that users can take action on those records

Impact

As the user of custom data types grow in Flow, we now have our most popular record selection mechanism (DataTable), to display that data for users to take action

All Editions

81 of 846

Screen Theme Picker

Preview screens with style settings from your Lightning Experience themes or Experience Cloud sites.

Customer Need

Previously customers couldn’t see how a given theme or set of branding rules would take effect on their screen flows. This meant customers would have to publish a site with a flow in it before they could verify the UX expectations were met.

Solution / How To Configure

When you have a screen open in Flow Builder, use the Preview Style picker to select a Lightning Experience theme or Experience Cloud site. The canvas refreshes to use those settings.

Use Case

Preview your screen with branding from a Lightning Experience theme applied
Preview your screen with branding from an Aura or LWR site applied

Use Case

Activation Triggered Flows allow you to publish Segment data from Data Cloud to any destination. For example, contact information from a Segment can be published to SurveyMonkey via a Mulesoft Connector to create and track a user survey.

Impact

Customers can now push Data Cloud Activations to any target destination.

Data Cloud

Available for Data Cloud customers.

87 of 846

Application Lifecycle Management

88 of 846

Screen Flow Debugging Enhancements

Test and debug screen flows faster and easier

Customer Need

Customers are overloaded with information in the flow run results when testing their flows and cannot find the information they need to debug and test their screens. Screen debugging also happened in a new window and took several seconds to start.

Solution / How To Configure

Screen flows now use the previously delivered card-based view to consolidate information and prevent text overload. Debugging now also happens directly in flow builder, speeding up the time it takes to start the screen flow.

Use Case

Any person that wants to debug or test their screen flow will now see the new experience.

All Editions

89 of 846

General Debugging Enhancements

Test and debug all flows faster and easier with the new debug setup panel

Customer Need

Debugging large flows is difficult when you need to find specific elements in the canvas when looking at large debug run results
Actions often return large amounts of data in a collection, making it difficult to read
The debug setup modal can become cramped when many inputs are on screen, like with Record Triggered flows
It can be difficult to inspect both the debug results and element configuration at the same time

Solution / How To Configure

A new ‘View in Canvas’ shortcut for each debug result card quickly jumps you to the affected element
Action elements now format collection inputs and outputs into a legible format
A new expandable and collapsible setup panel lets you expand the debug setup to fit more onto the screen
Debug results are now on the left, letting users view the run results and element configuration at the same time

All Editions

90 of 846

Flow Persistent Logging

End-to-End visibility into Flow execution for greater reliability

Flow Approvals

95 of 846

Flow Activation Approval

A framework for auditable Flow activation

Customer Need

Admins need to extend the ability to design approvals to process owners. With that, they want to ensure that drafted approvals are submitted for review and approval before activation.

Solution / How To Configure

Now users can create autolaunched flow approval processes in the Approvals App without the Manage Flow permission. They can open an autolaunched flow approval process in Flow Builder, then click Submit for Activation, and then select a user to review the flow approval process. Users with Manage Flow permission can activate approval orchestrations submitted for review.

Use Case

A sales manager, who is not a Salesforce admin, wishes to make an update to an approval process. They can submit the new version with edits for activation approval from the admin.

Impact

Enhanced governance, reduced admin bottlenecks

Enterprise + Editions Only

96 of 846

Dynamic Resource Assignment

Simplifying assignment of an interactive or approval step to a resource

Customer Need

Flow designers wish to reduce the configuration complexity for orchestration process types, and avoid errors that arise from managing various resource types when assigning work items.

Solution / How To Configure

Add a text resource to your orchestration that contains a username or the API name of a group or queue at run time. In an interactive/approval step, in the Select Someone to Complete the Action section, for Assignee Type, select Resource. Then for Resource, select the text resource you added.

Use Case

Rather than assigning an approval step to a static user resource, store your approver in a dynamic resource and let the Orchestration determine the resource type at runtime, avoiding inconsistencies with hardcoded, static assignees.

Impact

Greater automation flexibility, improved user experience

Enterprise + Editions Only

97 of 846

Scale Center

98 of 846

Scale Center - Reports Insights

On Demand Insights and recommendations to improve reports performance

Customer Need

Customers need more control on the cadence at which Reports Insights are made available to align with their deployment schedules. . Previously they were available weekly which was sub optimal. Now with On Demand they can optimize the performance of their business critical reports at a much higher cadence.

Solution / How To Configure

Use the ‘Generate New Reports Insights’ feature under Scale Insights. This will generate the reports Insights on demand with week’s summary of the slowest reports by Db CPU time as well as prescriptive recommendations on how to optimize performance of these reports

Use Case

Review the on demand insights generated under Reports Insights

Improve the reports performance by implementing the recommendations

Impact

Proactively identify expensive reports

Implement recommendations

Improve org implementation and scale health

UE (Prod and Full Copy SandBox)�and Signature Orgs

99 of 846

Scale Center - Search Insights

On Demand insights and recommendations to improve Search Performance

Customer Need

Customers need insights on top indexed entities which are never queried or Queried but never clicked. These entities consume lot of system resources and by disabling them, the customer can get better search performance.

Solution / How To Configure

Use the ‘Search Insights’ feature under Scale Insights. This will have a weekly summary of the entities which are never queried and entities which are queried but never clicked. The report will also have key takeaways and insights on how to optimize search performance.

Use Case

Review the weekly insights generated under Search Insights feature

Improve search performance by disabling entities which are not used

Impact

Proactively identify expensive search entities

Implement recommendations

Improve search implementation and scale health

UE (Prod and Full Copy SandBox)

and Signature Orgs

100 of 846

Scale Center - Database Insights

On Demand insights and recommendations to improve Database Performance

Customer Need

Customers need on demand insights on slowest SOQL’s for their Org based on runtime telemetry and also actionable recommendations on how to optimize these. SOQL’s consume lot of system resources and by optimizing them, the customer can get better application performance

Solution / How To Configure

Use the ‘Database Insights’ feature under Scale Insights and click on ‘Generate Database Insights Report’. This will generate last week’s summary of the slowest SOQL’s for the org. The report will also have key takeaways and recommendations on how to optimize SOQL’s

Use Case

Review the on demand Database Insights report generated

Improve SOQL performance by implementing the recommendations

Impact

Proactively identify slow SOQL’s

Implement recommendations

Improve DB performance and scale health

UE (Prod and Full Copy SandBox)

and Signature Orgs

101 of 846

Scale Center - Integration in CSS THS Portal

Provide Scale Center integration in CSS THS Portal

Customer Need

Customers with low Technical Health Score require self serve insights and prescriptive recommendations on how to root cause issues

Solution / How To Configure

Enhance the existing THS experience in CSS Portal by providing deep linking of Scale Center at the individual signal level. Customers can use self-serve insights of Scale Center to root cause performance issues

Use Case

View the Technical Health Score (THS) for the Org

If score is low, click on Scale Center link to navigate to the product

Review performance metrics and run deep dive investigations

Impact

Navigate directly to Scale Center from THS

Run relevant Scale Center investigation when scores are low

Improve technical health of the org

Signature Orgs

102 of 846

Enable Scale Center - Non EUOZ

Enable Scale Center in EU for Non HF OZ customers

Customer Need

Several Customers hosted on CHE*/DEU* Pods who had not signed the HF OZ contract did not have access to Scale Center & ApexGuru as the access was provided at the POD level. Due to re architecture of EUOZ, now non HF OZ customers have access to the product.

Solution / How To Configure

There is no action required by the customers. They can access Scale Center through the existing product experience under setup and Scale Center will be available.

Live Test Monitoring & Advanced Debugging

JMeter Features for Enhanced Test Execution & Troubleshooting

Customer Need

Performance teams need real-time visibility and detailed error reporting to quickly debug and manage long-running tests, as current lack of these features leads to inefficient troubleshooting.

Solution / How To Configure

Our platform now features a live UI for real-time test status (pass/fail). It provides complete error information, including the full response, similar to JMeter's "View Result Tree," for deep analysis. You can also stop a specific script during bulk execution.

Use Case

A team running a multi-script load test sees errors on one script. They use the live monitoring and "View Results Tree" feature to get full error details, then stop the single script to fix it without stopping the whole test.

Impact

Enables immediate visibility and control over tests, significantly reducing debugging time, leading to faster issue resolution and improved overall efficiency.

Hyperforce Full Copy Sandbox Add-on

Pilot

Demo

107 of 846

Load Generation & Workload Management

Democratizing Performance Testing with Self-Service Tools

Customer Need

Customers need a unified, in-platform solution for performance testing. Reliance on fragmented, costly external scripting tools and on-premise infrastructure for load generation is inefficient and complex, creating barriers to effective performance testing.

Solution / How To Configure

This pilot feature enables users to import existing test scripts directly from GitHub. From the UI, users can create workload definitions based on their scripts, then create test runs based on those workloads.

Use Case

A developer needs to performance-test a new feature. They import their existing test script from their GitHub repository directly into the new UI. They then define a workload and create a test run based on it, executing the load test directly from the UI without needing any external tools or infrastructure.

Impact

Democratizes performance testing by providing an integrated, self-service solution and eliminates the need for external tooling and on-premise infrastructure, simplifying the end-to-end scale testing experience and making it more accessible and efficient.

Hyperforce Full Copy Sandbox Add-on

Pilot

Demo

108 of 846

Live Client-Side Test Monitoring

Real-time Performance Insights for Proactive Debugging

Customer Need

Performance engineering teams lack real-time visibility during test execution. A significant customer request highlighted the need for live dashboards to monitor scripts, as current tooling makes it difficult to proactively identify and respond to performance issues.

Solution / How To Configure

This pilot feature provides a live UI dashboard which displays key metrics as the test runs, including Response Codes, Requests per Second, Response Time, etc. This functionality provides instant insights, enabling users to monitor system behavior and identify issues as they occur.

Use Case

A performance engineering team while running a load test can instantly spot a sudden spike in the error rate or a drop in response time. This real-time visibility allows them to immediately pinpoint the issue, stop the test if necessary, and prevent potential issues from escalating.

Impact

Enables proactive test management and faster issue identification by providing immediate, granular insights into test performance. This functionality helps to avoid negative impact from high error rates and significantly reduces the time and effort required for debugging.

Hyperforce Full Copy Sandbox Add-on

Pilot

109 of 846

Playwright as a Load Type

Enabling End-to-End UI Load Testing

Customer Need

Customers require a way to conduct comprehensive end-to-end testing, including real-time visibility into UI load performance. Current tools primarily focus on backend performance, leaving a critical gap in understanding client-side bottlenecks.

Solution / How To Configure

Playwright is a new load type for UI-based testing. It collects key client-side metrics like Experience Page Time (EPT) and script duration, and provides screenshots on error. This provides a complete view of performance by complementing existing backend load types like JMeter.

Use Case

A team uses Playwright to test a new UI feature. They simulate concurrent users and monitor real-time metrics like EPT. By using on-error screenshots, they can quickly identify UI-related performance bottlenecks and debug script failures in-test.

Impact

This feature provides a complete, end-to-end scale testing experience. It empowers teams to proactively identify and resolve client-side bottlenecks, improving overall application quality and reducing the need for external UI testing tools.

Hyperforce Full Copy Sandbox Add-on

Pilot

110 of 846

Sales Cloud

111 of 846

Agentforce for Sales

112 of 846

AI-Powered Account Research

Research customers and fill out Account Plans with a click

Customer Need

Account teams can spend up to 15 hours researching and aligning on an account strategy. Account Research can eliminate hours of effort by consolidating key company insights using generative AI.

Solution / How To Configure

First enable Einstein Generative AI and Data Cloud. Then turn on Account Research, add the research component to Account and Account Plan Lightning pages, and assign the permission set to users. If desired, use Prompt Builder to customize the prompts used to generate research.

Use Case

Quickly understand the customer’s competitive landscape, industry, challenges and priorities in order to create targeted outreach and growth strategies. After reviewing the research, use it to automatically fill out fields on the Account Plan.

Impact

Boost seller productivity

Improve customer relationships

Agentforce

113 of 846

Agentforce Pipeline Management

Keep deals moving with post-meeting suggested actions

Customer Need

Meeting follow up is a key step in closing a deal, but sellers struggle to do it well. Difficulty capturing key details and action items during meetings and heavy workloads make it difficult to send timely, personalized follow-ups. This leads to missed opportunities, slows down the sales cycle, and ultimately impacts revenue.

Solution / How To Configure

First, enable Pipeline Management in Setup. Then create the agent in Agent Builder using the Sales Management template. For meeting follow up capabilities, ensure Einstein Conversation Insights is also enabled.

Use Case

Agentforce automatically extracts recommended post-meeting follow up and action items from conversation transcripts and partners with sellers to execute actions via conversational UI.

Impact

Improved seller productivity

Faster deal cycles

*Planned for off-cycle release on October 9, 2025

Agentforce

114 of 846

Sales Planning

115 of 846

Target and Quota Lifecycle

Create targets for segments and territories

Customer Need

Previously quota plans were disconnected from the overall planning experience and could not be done by product. This adds a new product dimension and connects segment and quota plans together.

Solution / How to Configure

Create a product hierarchy and a goal to get started. You can input targets on a segment and those will populate in quota plans on those segments.

Use Case

Multi-dimensional target planning for sales.

Impact

Connected Planning

Time to Value

Segmentation & Quota Planning

Available starting in Sales Planning v256.8

More details on this feature can be found here.

116 of 846

Auto Geo Field Mapping for Live Data

Visualize your data with less clicks

Customer Need

Jump right into the carving experience by having required data automatically configured even if geographic fields aren’t included in your data set

Solution / How to Configure

Upon alignment creation, latitude and longitude will be auto mapped based on available data in your source object rather than your data set. Once a postal code boundary set is added, postal code and country will be auto mapped too

Use Case

Streamline the setup process by requiring less data upfront from the user

Impact

Ease of use

Time to Value

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

117 of 846

Boundary Set Additions to Live Data

Carve with non-postal code boundaries

Customer Need

Carve territories using non-postal code boundaries for many countries around the world

Solution / How to Configure

Head to the geographic setup in an alignment, navigate countless non-postal code boundaries from around the globe, and begin carving

Use Case

Users can now utilize live data instead of static due to an updated boundary library

Impact

Usability

Feature Parity

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

118 of 846

Boundary Set Filtering for Live Data

Focus on the data that matters most

Customer Need

Filter down boundary sets to remove those that will not be used during territory creation

Solution / How to Configure

Head to the geographic setup in an alignment, edit an existing boundary, and remove subsets of geographic boundaries which the user doesn’t plan to utilize within their focus

Use Case

As a user creating geographic territories for a specific area, such as Georgia, I can now remove all other boundaries from the map.

Impact

Usability

Feature Parity

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

119 of 846

Improved Boundary Matching Logic

Conforming the tool around your data; not vice versa

Customer Need

Remove the requirement for exact matches between your customer data and postal code boundaries in order to match them with one another more efficiently

Solution / How to Configure

If your customer data isn’t a 1:1 match with boundary data, the tool will automatically look for partial matches in order to marry the two together alleviating the need to update your data

Use Case

As a user carving territories with 3-digit US zip codes but my customer data includes 5 digits, I no longer have to create formula fields to update my data to conform to a specific data format

Impact

Usability

Reduced Customer Friction

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

120 of 846

Assign Boundaries Based on Most Units

Align territories around existing customers

Customer Need

Assign boundaries to territories based on existing customer relationships

Solution / How to Configure

Select boundaries from the map or legend that need to be adjusted, select assign by logic in the legend, then select assign based on the most units. Boundaries will change areas based on the existing assignments for units within them.

Use Case

Update territories to include boundaries which already include assigned customers

Impact

Usability

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

121 of 846

Define Boundaries During Territory Import

Simplify setup and visualize data faster

Customer Need

Allow a user to import boundaries while importing a territory hierarchy from Sales Territories or another alignment

Solution / How to Configure

Edit the territory model, import from Sales Territories or another alignment, and specify boundary options. Upon import, view territories with both boundaries and customers assigned from the start

Use Case

Reduce setup time by allowing the user to handle territory creation and boundary creation in the same streamlined process

Impact

Time to Value

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

122 of 846

Summarize Territory Carving

View optimization insights and AI generated summaries

Customer Need

Allow a user to understand the impact of territory optimization impact on geographic carving

Solution / How to Configure

Confirm Einstein GPT is enabled for the org. Run an optimization and view the results in the selection summary and side panel summary.

Use Case

Increase understanding of optimization outputs and measure territory balance to drive trust and consensus of the proposed territory alignments

Impact

NPS

Stakeholder Alignment and Transparency

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

123 of 846

Generate Formulas

Save time calculating attributes by using AI-generated formulas

Customer Need

Allow a user to create calculated attribute formula using generative AI

Solution / How to Configure

Confirm Einstein GPT is enabled for the org. Open the Calculated Attribute Formula Generator. Use a suggestion or describe a formula.

Use Case

Reduce setup time by allowing the user to build complex formulas with generative AI. View a preview of the formula output to confirm accuracy.

Impact

Time to Value

Territory Planning

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

124 of 846

Plan Segmentation with Sales Territories

Simplify setup and visualize data faster

Customer Need

Allow a user to import territory hierarchy and its rules from Sales Territories into Segmentation. And also, publish the updated segment hierarchy and its rules back to Sales Territories

Solution / How to Configure

Edit the segments by importing an existing territory hierarchy from Sales Territories along with rules. Publish the updated segments and back to Sales Territories along with rules and user assignments.

Use Case

Reduce setup time by letting you reuse your existing Sales Territory Models in Sales Planning. And also keep the two in sync by publishing your segments back to Sales Territories.

Impact

Time to Value

Segmentation

Available staring in Maps v256.x

More details on this feature can be found here.

125 of 846

Generate Segments

Use AI to intelligently model sales segments

Customer Need

Add, edit, and generate groupings for descendant segments based a field with help from generative AI.

Solution / How to Configure

ECI Out-of-the-box Flows

Leverage ECI data throughout the Salesforce platform

Customer Need

Customers want to leverage ECI's powerful data for automated workflows, but the current process of building them from the ground up is time consuming. This friction limits the ability to achieve fast time-to-value and fully capitalize on the potential of ECI data.

Solution / How To Configure

Administrators can toggle-on ECI Flows in Setup and enable them in Flow Builder.

Use Case

As a seller, I want to be able to generate follow up emails that are grounded in call data after a meeting concludes.

As a seller, I want to be able to update my next steps a on opportunities with a single click that is grounded in conversation data.

Impact

Sales rep time to value is reduced from hours to minutes. Reduced friction and improved efficiency for administrators.

DC1 Support - �Consumption Forecasting

Customer Need

Enterprise customers often run multiple Salesforce orgs but want one central Data Cloud (DC1) to power consumption forecasting.

Solution / How To Configure

Admin needs to install the Forecasting file based data kit on Home org against the right companion org where consumption forecasting will be used.

Use Case

Orgs with DC1 configuration will be able to use consumption forecasting from each of the individual CRM org that is connected with the Home DC org

Impact

Data consistency and no need for duplication

Enterprise �and above

Requires DC1 license

136 of 846

Custom Fiscal Year Support - Consumption Forecasting

Customer Need

Customers with custom fiscal year enabled want to forecast their consumption revenue based on their calendar settings and labels

Solution / How To Configure

Create a consumption forecast type from admin setup

Use Case

Sales reps and managers will view the KPIs aggregated based on how your calendar is setup as forecast periods or quarters

Impact

Sales rep productivity

Enterprise �and above

137 of 846

Sales Agents for Lead Generation and Nurturing + Seller Experiences

138 of 846

Sales Agent Modularity

Greater control and customization of your Agent

Customer Need

The current Sales Agent for Lead Nurturing is a rigid "black box," making it difficult for customers to customize core functions (like meeting links) or debug errors. This causes frustration and slows down deployments.

Solution / How To Configure

We are breaking the agent's logic into discrete, configurable Topics and Actions within Agent Builder. Admins can now directly see and modify each step of the agent's workflow, eliminating the need for complex prompt engineering.

Use Case

An admin needs the agent to use a custom Calendly link. They can now go into Agent Builder, find the "Generate Meeting Link" action, and insert their custom link. The agent will immediately begin using it for all meeting requests.

Impact

Simplified configuration accelerates agent deployment and success.

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Agentforce SDR add-on

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

139 of 846

Sales Agent Scaling & Multi-Configuration

Tailor prospecting by creating multiple agent configurations

Customer Need

A single, shared agent configuration is too generic and limits adoption. Sales teams need agents that can be tailored for different products, regions, or sales motions.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Agent Managers to create and manage multiple, distinct agent configurations within a single org. Admins can clone and modify existing configurations to quickly deploy agents for different teams or use cases.

Use Case

A company creates two agent configurations: one for their SMB team using high-volume outreach, and another for their Enterprise team that uses a more personalized, consultative approach.

Impact

Increases SDR effectiveness, improves rep productivity.

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

140 of 846

SMS Messaging for Sales Cloud

Simpler Out of the Box SMS within Sales Cloud

Customer Need

Sales customers want to send SMS to their customers to build relationships with them. However, Digital Engagement is very difficult to set up, and not OOTB usable in Sales Cloud – instead requiring deep customization, which is a blocker.

Solution / How To Configure

Digital Engagement now can be used more OOTB in Sales Cloud. You can now assign 1:1 numbers for Sales Reps, add SMS to Cadences (requires Sales Engagement Add-On), make it easy to send SMS from Contact and Lead Records, and view SMS on Activity Timeline

Use Case

A Sales rep wants to send SMS to their prospects in order to nudge them and generate pipeline

Impact

Sending SMS just got much easier. Once numbers are provisioned, assigning phone numbers and sending SMS can be done in significantly less clicks by Admins and Reps

Sales Cloud UE & EE + Digital Engagement

141 of 846

Sales Agent Calendar Link + Opt Out

Allow Sales Agent to effectively wrap up communications

Customer Need

Sales Agents need to effectively complete communications with customers in both positive or negative scenarios, but rely on confirmation from the customer.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can include a calendar link or an opt-out button to the Sales Agent’s messages, allowing their prospects to end the conversation if disinterested, or follow up with a sales rep at a convenient time.

Use Case

After receiving unwanted outreach from an agent, a prospect clicks the Opt-out button within the email. For outreach of interest, the prospect requests a meeting time, to which the Sales Agent responds with an email that includes a calendar link.

Impact

Sales rep productivity, Sales Agent efficacy

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

142 of 846

Simple Sales Agent Creation

Create tailored prospecting agents in minutes

Customer Need

Building Sales Agents is too complex for non-technical users. Sales teams need an effortless way to create and deploy agents tailored to their unique prospecting needs.

Solution / How To Configure

Using our new Simple Agent Creation, users can follow a fast and guided set of actions to get their agents running in just minutes. Managers will be taken to this setup experience directly from Salesforce Go.

Use Case

An Agent Manager looking to deploy a new Sales Agent turns on Agentforce for Sales and follows the fast Sales Agent Creation process before deploying an optimized agent for his/her org.

Impact

Implementation time, sales agent effectiveness

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

143 of 846

Sales Agent Queues and Bulk Assignment

Activate your Sales Agent for multiple records at once.

Customer Need

Sellers looking to activate their Sales Agents for more than 1 record at a time have had to individually activate their Agents for records or rely on ‘Rules of Engagement’. When assignment limits are reached, they cannot add to an existing queue of activations.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can mass activate their Sales Agents in List Views or the Control Center. Assignments that exceed limits will be added to a queue which is visible within the SDR Control Center.

Use Case

When automating a long list of prospects, sellers can activate the SDR directly from a list view, even if the total number of activated prospects exceeds their daily limit. To check on the status of those activations, the seller can navigate to the Control Center.

Impact

Sales rep productivity, SDR efficacy

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

144 of 846

Sales Agent on Web

Automate lead generation through your Web channel w/AI

Customer Need

Customers want to build a larger funnel of Leads to nurture to generate more revenue for their business, but don’t have the bandwidth to staff Sales Reps on their websites to field incoming questions from prospect visitors.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can now add Topics to their Agentforce Service Agents to perform Sales specific Jobs – Sales Record Creation and Prospect Meeting Scheduling

Use Case

A business wants to use AI to automate Lead Generation with new website visitors

Impact

Customers can now build a single Agent in Agent Builder that can perform both Sales & Service specific jobs

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions with the Agentforce SDR add-on

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

145 of 846

Control Center within Command Center

Integrate Sales Agent with other Agent Monitoring

Customer Need

Supervisors lose time and efficiency by switching between Omni Supervisor (now Agent Command Center), and the separate SDR Monitoring app.

Solution / How To Configure

The SDR Monitoring app is now a tab within Agent Command Center. It appears automatically for new setups. For existing custom configurations, an Admin must add it manually. The standalone app remains available.

Use Case

A manager views SDR performance dashboards by clicking the new tab directly within the Command Center console, without switching apps.

Impact

Increased supervisor / manager productivity.

EE, PE, & UE w/Agentforce

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

146 of 846

Revenue Cloud

147 of 846

Revenue Cloud Billing

148 of 846

Billing Self Service Portal Template

Enable a seamless, self-service billing experience for Community & Partner Users

Customer Need

Provide end customers with 24x7 access to their invoices and payment options to reduce support costs and improve customer satisfaction

Solution / How To Configure

Publish an Experience Cloud website using the OOB Billing Self Service Portal template.

Assign the ‘Billing Experience Cloud User’ permset to community plus/partner users.

Use Case

Ready to use Experience Cloud template for Billing Self Service with the following features:

View Invoices and Invoice Details
Download Invoice Document
Make a payment for an Invoice via Credit Card/ACH
Manage Saved Payment Methods

Impact

Reduces billing support and operational costs
Enhances end customer experience

Supported payment methods : Credit Card & ACH

Native integration only

149 of 846

Invoice Sequencing

Systematically assign unique gapless sequential numbers to posted invoices

Customer Need

Customers face operational complexity managing large volumes of invoices, ensuring unique, sequential numbering for legal compliance, audit, and reconciliation

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Sequential Numbering settings from Billing Setup and create Sequence Policies according to regional legal regulations

Use Case

Upon invoice posting, the system auto-assigns a unique, sequential number based on the sequence policy matching with that invoice

Impact

Ensures audit-readiness and regulatory compliance
Prevents duplicate billing errors & fraudulent activities
Enhances customer trust by following consistent, professional invoicing practices

150 of 846

Legal Entity based Invoice Grouping

Automatically group invoices by Legal Entity

Customer Need

Businesses with multiple legal entities need to ensure that invoices accurately represent the legal entity responsible for the sale, for correct tax jurisdiction and regulatory adherence

Solution / How To Configure

No setup needed.

The default invoice grouping for all billing schedules has been updated to include Legal Entity along with existing criteria(Account, Bill To Contact, Payment Terms, Currency, Tax Engine)

Use Case

The legal entity will be stamped on the invoice upon creation, and invoice lines will be grouped such that all have the same LE

Impact

Allow businesses to configure legal entity based invoice sequencing
Simplifies accounting by consolidating invoice lines per legal entity

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

151 of 846

Milestone Billing: Negotiations

Create and Negotiate Billing Milestone Plans for Quote Lines or Order Products

Customer Need

For professional services and project billing, businesses need to create, and negotiate milestone plans upfront during the quoting stage to ensure clear expectations and cash flow predictability

Solution / How To Configure

No setup needed

Use Case

Billing Ops or Sales Reps can precreate billing milestone plans and link to one time Quote Line Items or Order Products. The same Milestone Plan will be used for the Billing Schedule when it is created for that transaction.

Impact

Allow Sales reps to negotiate milestone plans with customers before finalising the Quote or Order

152 of 846

Mass email delivery of invoices for an IBR

With template & attachment preferences at Billing Profile & Legal Entity

Customer Need

Businesses need a fast, reliable and automated solution for bulk delivery of invoices to end customers, ensuring timely payments and reducing administrative workload

Solution / How To Configure

Configure Email Delivery Settings from the Billing Setup and select the Default Invoice Email Template. Billing Admin/Ops user can override this org default template on Legal Entity and Billing Profile level.

Use Case

Billing Admin/Ops User use the ‘Email Invoices’ action on a completed Invoice Batch Run to trigger mass emails for all invoices processed in that run.

Impact

Saves time and operational costs by removing manual intervention
Faster Payments and Improved Cash Flow by sending out timely invoice emails

153 of 846

Billing Agent: Explain Invoice Charges

Get a detailed charge breakdown for invoice lines

Customer Need

Share a detailed charge breakdown for ambiguous invoice lines so that customer inquiries can be addressed quickly and erroneous invoices can be identified.

Solution / How To Configure

Revenue Cloud Billing & Agentforce Licenses required, with Billing Agent pilot perm added

Use Case

Internal users can interact with the Billing Agent to get a charge breakdown for different types of invoice lines:

OneTime
Evergreen/Termed Subscriptions
Milestone Billed
Usage based
New sale and ARC impacted charges

Impact

Faster resolution of billing inquiries
Reduce number of billing disputes

Revenue �Cloud Billing

154 of 846

Billing Account (Profile) - Enhancements

Simpler experience & additional information on billing profile

Customer Need

As business scale more and more complex scenarios are expected to be handled by a typical billing product. Customers need a way to:

Specify a default payment method to be used for all transactions
Skip automatic payments against transactions
Preferred Invoice delivery method/template etc

Solution / How To Configure

Add additional fields on billing account to allow users to select their preferences easily. Below items to be added

Allow selection of account to associate a billing account (profile) to an account
Default Save Payment Method
Skip automatic Payment Flag
Invoice delivery preference �

Use Case

As a billing ops user I should be able to specify details to the billing system so that my preferences are honored at the time of billing

Impact

Improved CSAT
Ease of use

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Billing Profile

155 of 846

Custom field support in Order to Billing API

Ability to add custom fields on billing schedules & groups via Order to BS and Standalone API

Customer Need

Customers who support different business models often have needs to pass down certain fields to billing in order to ensure the details are tracked on billing transactions

Solution / How To Configure

Allow adding custom fields on Billing Schedule Group & Billing Schedule

Use Case

As a sales rep/billing ops user I should be able to add/ send additional details to billing like: Purchase order number, SKU ID etc so that these details can be shown on the right transactions
As a user of the product/service I would like to view my preferred details on the bills I receive so that I know what am being billed for �

Impact

Extended support to pass any data to billing
Improves CSAT

156 of 846

Asset

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Businesses often need to transfer assets in various scenarios—such as during mergers, departmental reorganizations, ownership changes, or subscription migrations.

Use Case

As a billing ops user, I should be able to initiate an asset transfer from one account to another, so that the billing system can continue billing the right customer without service disruption.

Solution / How To Configure

Initiate an asset transfer as a type of amendment. No setup needed on Billing. System automatically cancels the BSG on the older account and creating a new BSG on the transferred account. Also, keeping reference of old the BSG for better reporting.

Impact

Support of advanced amendments
Improved CSAT
Ease of use

157 of 846

Coterminous Contract

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Businesses often purchase additional products or services after the initial contract starts. To simplify management and billing, they want all their contracts to end on the same date—coterminous with the original contract—instead of tracking multiple end dates.

Use Case

As a billing ops user, system should be able to align the end date of new products or subscriptions to the existing contract’s end date, so that the customer receives a single, unified invoice cycle and a streamlined renewal experience.

Solution / How To Configure

Set ‘Contract Co-Termination’ to TRUE
Quotes/Order associated to this Contract now enforce subscription co-termination to contract end date
No setup needed for Billing. System automatically creates a new sale BSG honoring the end dates from Upstream

Impact

Support of advanced amendments
Improved CSAT
Ease of use

When this flag is checked, quotes and orders associated to this contract enforce subscription co-termination to contract end date

158 of 846

Group Ramps - Support

Customer Need

Sales teams need to quote group ramp deals in a single transaction with segment-specific pricing and configurations, while ensuring a clean downstream asset structure for accurate billing and easy amendments. They also need the ability to add termed defined bundle products as part of the ramp deal.

Solution / How To Configure

No setup needed.

Use Case

As a sales rep, I should be able to:

Create a Group Ramp deal where product configuration or pricing changes over time.
Add a termed bundle product to the group.
Make sure these grouped ramps create a single asset/multiple if bundle and is eventually creating a single BSG/ related BSG in case of bundles
Make sure that the invoice represents the Asset in a clean and structured way

Impact

Cleaner Invoice
Improved CSAT
Ease of use

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

159 of 846

Support for Group Ramps �with Bundle Support

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Sales Reps need the ability to add termed defined bundle products as part of the ramp deal and to configure different child configurations for each ramp segments.

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, I need to add Termed Defined Bundle product to 3 ramp deal and have different child configuration year 2 onwards.
Example: “Implementation Support” is child of a bundle and should be only available in the 1st year and not in 2nd/3rd year.

Solution / How To Configure

Use Segment Level “Browse Catalogue” to add Bundle product, on next screen select “Add to Current and Future segments”
Use “configure” to select different child, child attributes or quantities - these changes are forward propagated to all subsequent segments.
No setup needed for Billing.

Impact

Improved CSAT
Ease of use

160 of 846

Pull in / Push out of billing start dates

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Customer often come up with a request to start early or delay their services before they have started.

Use Case

Scenario 1: Pull In (Start Billing Early)

Example: A customer’s service start date moves from a future date to an earlier one, requiring billing to begin sooner.

Scenario 2: Push Out (Delay Billing)

Example: A customer’s deployment is delayed, and they need to defer billing until the service is fully operational.

Solution / How To Configure

No setup needed. System automatically updates the BSG & BS to support Pull In and Push Out for Billing accordingly from the pullin/pushout order created upstream.

Impact

Support of advanced amendments

Improved CSAT

Ease of use

161 of 846

Usage Management

162 of 846

Consumption of Tokens and Commitments

Consumption processing & Invoicing of usage tokens and commitments

Customer Need

Support usage consumption using tokens
Support consumption of token commitments

Solution

A system for processing token consumption and commitments, which includes usage tracking, overage calculation with token rates and drawdown mechanism for commitments.

Use Case

The system automatically tracks usage in tokens, applies token rates and calculates overages.
If the customer has token commitments, these are drawn down (prioritizing earlier expiring ones) before overage charges apply

Impact

Increased transparency and control over resource usage and billing, predictable costs based on token commitments, and clear understanding of overages.

Revenue �Cloud Billing

163 of 846

Consumption Agent

Instantly identify overages and act on upsell opportunities

Customer Need

Sales rep’s and customers want a streamlined view of overage details in clicks, avoiding the need for multiple steps. This directly helps them understand overages on resources and enables upsell opportunities.

Solution / How To Configure

Revenue Cloud Advance+Revenue Cloud Billing & Agentforce Licenses required

Use Case

Sales reps uses the Consumption Agent to proactively find overages for a customer account.

Agent provides a detailed breakdown of overages at the resource level. The agent then automates the quote process by selecting the most suitable product pack and creates the quote

Impact

Automated Identification of Overage on resources
Automated Upsell opportunity on Accounts

Revenue Cloud Advance + Billing

165 of 846

Flexible Tax Contract

Extend the tax contract to support additional attributes

Customer Need

Want to add custom fields to the tax contract and also consume additional fields on the response into tax lines object

Solution / How To Configure

Leverage custom metadata type. Admin defines the fields to use from either invoice or invoice line objects to be sent in the request to the tax engine. Admin defines the fields to consume from the response and update fields on invoice / invoice line / invoice line tax objects

Use Case

As a tax admin I want to include custom fields that I would prefer to send to my tax calculation provider
As a tax admin I want to consume the additional information that my tax engine responds back and save them in Salesforce �

Impact

Flexibility in extending the existing tax interface contract as per customer needs
SIs can build additional functionality and do NOT have to wait for Product to include those attributes

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Mention on Tax Engine Provider

166 of 846

Credit Taxes using the same Tax Rate

as Original Invoice Date

Ensure tax rates of previous invoice date are used while crediting

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

As a billing Operations user, I want the billing system to be tax compliant in terms of accuracy when it comes to tax rates applied for credits

Solution

Updated tax contract to include pass along the Original Invoice ID and its invoice date when requesting Credits

Use Case

Use same tax rate used while invoicing when issuing credits

Impact

Accuracy in Sales Tax Liability calculations
Tax Compliance while issuing Credits
Reduces manual effort to validate and reconcile tax rates on credits during AR

Included Original Invoice references and Original Invoice Tax Effective Date for every line in the request when requesting credits

167 of 846

Debits & Credits

168 of 846

Debit Memo

Support issuance of Debit Memo for additional charges

Customer Need

Customers often have a need to levy additional charges apart from what is already invoiced for scenarios like:

Late payment fees, cancellation fees, erroneous invoice issued etc.�

Solution

Issue a debit memo for the additional charges, approve & auto charge as an Invoice Line on the next Invoice.

Debit memo can be issued against an asset/invoice line/refund/contract

Debit memo can also be converted into its own Invoice and marked processed.�

Use Case

As a billing ops user I should be able to issue a debit memo for additional charges like - late payment fees, erroneous invoices etc.�

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Revenue �Cloud Billing

169 of 846

Credit Memo: Create a draft & post

Ability to create a credit memo in draft status and post it

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Customers have a need to seek approval before issuing /finalizing a credit issuance for which they need to issue a credit memo in draft status

Solution

Ability to create a credit memo in draft status (send for approval) and post it

Use Case

As a billing/credit ops user I should be able to issue a credit in draft status and send it for approval (happens outside of RCB) and then post the credit once changes are finalized

Impact

Improves CSAT

Adds more flexibility to the customer business cases

170 of 846

Credit Memo Apply Flow

Ability to apply an available credit memo to an Invoice

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Customers need an easy way to apply available credits to an existing Invoice against an account. Today they have to build their custom solution using credit memo apply APIs

Solution

Ship an OOTB screenflow where customers can select a credit memo to be applied against an Invoice

Ability to select one or more invoice lines if the org level preference is to apply at line level. User can select invoice line and mention the balance to be applied from credit memo.

Use Case

As a billing/credit ops user I should be able to apply an available credit against an Invoice/Invoice Line so that I can settle the Invoice balance (full/partial)

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Extensibility: Available as a Flow to change and extend

171 of 846

Payments Enhancements

172 of 846

Third Party Payment Gateway Support

Customers can connect with any third party gateway to process payments/ Issue refunds

Customer Need

A typical B2B or Hi-tech customer conducts their business across various geographies and expects a billing product to support various gateway integrations in order to ensure their regional market needs are met while providing their customers with a seamless experience

Solution

Support third party gateway integrations using APEX adaptors to process payments / issue refunds / save a payment method for CC, ACH, SEPA, BECS, BACS

Use Case

Use any payment gateway, setup the APEX integration. Once done, tokenize the payment methods within Salesforce & Billing will seamlessly use those for automated payments for recurring invoices

Impact

Connect to your payment provider of choice & yet maintain seamless, automated cash flows.

Revenue �Cloud Billing

173 of 846

Guided Setup - Third Party Gateways

Customers need an easy way to configure third party gateways

Customer Need

Configuring/Connecting with a third-party gateway to process payments is rather a lengthy and confusing process with too many steps involved. Customers need a easy setup experience to reduce the time to configure.

Solution

Guided setup for third party payment gateways allowing customers to configure necessary items with click of few buttons

Use Case

As a payments administrator I would like to configure adapter classes, named credentials and create a payment gateway, provider so that I can allow my users to process payments seamlessly

Impact

Ease of use

Improved CSAT

Revenue �Cloud Billing

174 of 846

Additional Payment method support via 3P

Ability to process ACH,SEPA, BACS, BECS payments

Customer Need

Customers who operate across multiple geographies need regional payment method support from their billing system

Solution

Ability to save a ACH, SEPA, BACS, BECS payment method against third party gateway using the tokenize API

Ability to process payments with ACH, SEPA, BECS, BACS payment methods

Ability to issue refunds back to source for above mentioned payment methods

Use Case

As an account receivables manager I should be able to initiate a payment request with my third party gateway vendor by using already saved ACH, SEPA, BACS, BECS payment methods

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Revenue �Cloud Billing

175 of 846

NATIVE INTEGRATION: �Default payment method

This enhancement applies to Native integration ONLY. 3P does not provide this control

Customer Need

In B2B world where recurring billing/subscriptions is quite prominent, customers buyer need a way to define a particular payment method as default at account level so that it is automatically used in recurring payments for Invoices

Solution

Ability to save a payment method as default at account level

Ability for payment schedule to consider this default payment method and stamp it on auto-generated payment schedules & schedule items

Use Case

As an account receivables manager I should be able to declare a payment method as a default one against my user’s account (with user’s consent) so that the payment method can be charged for any purchases made

Impact

Reduces delinquency of Invoices/ Payment failures

Revenue �Cloud Billing

176 of 846

Collections

177 of 846

Debit Memo

Support issuance of Debit Memo for additional charges

Customer Need

Customers often have a need to levy additional charges apart from what is already invoiced for scenarios like :

Late payment fees, cancellation fees, erroneous invoice issued etc.�

Solution

Issue a debit memo for the additional charges, approve & auto charge as an Invoice Line on the next Invoice.

Debit memo can be issued against an asset/invoice line/refund/contract

Debit memo can also be converted into its own Invoice and marked processed.

Use Case

As a billing ops user I should be able to issue a debit memo for additional charges like - late payment fees, erroneous invoices etc.

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Revenue �Cloud Billing

178 of 846

Credit Memo: Create a draft & post

Ability to create a credit memo in draft status and post it

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Customers have a need to seek approval before issuing /finalizing a credit issuance for which they need to issue a credit memo in draft status

Solution

Ability to create a credit memo in draft status (send for approval) and post it

Use Case

As a billing/credit ops user I should be able to issue a credit in draft status and send it for approval (happens outside of RCB) and then post the credit once changes are finalized

Impact

Improves CSAT

Adds more flexibility to the customer business cases

179 of 846

Credit Memo Apply Flow

Ability to apply an available credit memo to an Invoice

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Customer Need

Customers need an easy way to apply available credits to an existing Invoice against an account. Today they have to build their custom solution using credit memo apply APIs

Solution

Ship an OOTB screenflow where customers can select a credit memo to be applied against an Invoice

Ability to select one or more invoice lines if the org level preference is to apply at line level. User can select invoice line and mention the balance to be applied from credit memo

Use Case

As a billing/credit ops user I should be able to apply an available credit against an Invoice/Invoice Line so that I can settle the Invoice balance (full/partial)

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Extensibility: Available as a Flow to change and extend

180 of 846

Third Party Payment Gateway Support

Customers can connect with any third party gateway to process payments/ Issue refunds

Customer Need

Solution

Support third party gateway integrations using APEX adaptors to process payments / issue refunds / save a payment method for CC, ACH, SEPA, BECS, BACS

Use Case

Use any payment gateway, setup the APEX integration. Once done, tokenize the payment methods within Salesforce & Billing will seamlessly use those for automated payments for recurring invoices

Impact

Connect to your payment provider of choice & yet maintain seamless, automated cash flows.

Revenue �Cloud Billing

181 of 846

Guided Setup - Third Party Gateways

Customers need an easy way to configure third party gateways

Customer Need

Solution

Guided setup for third party payment gateways allowing customers to configure necessary items with click of few buttons

Use Case

As a payments administrator I would like to configure adapter classes, named credentials and create a payment gateway, provider so that I can allow my users to process payments seamlessly

Impact

Ease of use

Improved CSAT

Revenue �Cloud Billing

182 of 846

Additional Payment method support via 3P

Ability to process ACH,SEPA, BACS, BECS payments

Customer Need

Customers who operate across multiple geographies need regional payment method support from their billing system

Solution

Ability to save a ACH, SEPA , BACS, BECS payment method against third party gateway using the tokenize API

Ability to process payments with ACH, SEPA , BECS , BACS payment methods

Ability to issue refunds back to source for above mentioned payment methods

Use Case

As an account receivables manager I should be able to initiate a payment request with my third party gateway vendor by using already saved ACH, SEPA , BACS , BECS payment methods

Impact

Improves CSAT as this is the most asked feature by majority of customers

Revenue �Cloud Billing

183 of 846

NATIVE INTEGRATION: �Default payment method

This enhancement applies to Native integration ONLY. �3P does not provide this control

Customer Need

Solution

Ability to save a payment method as default at account level

Ability for payment schedule to consider this default payment method and stamp it on auto-generated payment schedules & schedule items

Use Case

Impact

Reduces delinquency of Invoices/Payment failures

Revenue �Cloud Billing

184 of 846

Accounting

185 of 846

Legal Entity defaulting �on billing transactions

To make sure every transaction is considered during Accounting

Revenue Cloud Advanced & Billing

Primary Persona(s)

Accounts Receivables Admin

Customer Need

Ability to mention which legal entity to use on billing transactions, otherwise default to org default
System should report the transaction to the right accounting period based on legal entity and the transaction date�

Solution

Legal entity attribute in all APIs. Use the provided value as input, otherwise default to the Org Default. Inherit from parent for child entities.
In scenarios both are NULL do NOT consider the transaction for accounting journal entries�

Impact

Reduces effort to reconcile during accounting period closures
Accuracy in bookkeeping for AR, calculating accounting period closure summaries, etc.

186 of 846

Enhanced UX for GL Account Assignment Rules

Ease Of Use - Accounting Subledger for AR

Revenue �Cloud Billing

Primary Persona(s)

Accounts Receivables Admin

Customer Need

Simplified experience to define transaction journal rules for a specific transaction that meets certain criteria
Define a Percentage of a specific amount field to be used to write as debit and credit amounts when writing the journal entries
Support AR use cases where accounting needs to capture partial amounts

Solution

Capture Percentage to use of the amount field selected. Calculated values will be written to transaction journal as journal entries

Impact

Additional flexibility for AR to extend beyond configurations
One page to view all the rules

Criteria

Journal Entry Rules

187 of 846

FX Gain / Loss Calculations

Both realized and unrealized

Revenue �Cloud Billing

Primary Persona(s)

Accounts Receivables Admin

Customer Need

Post foreign exchange gain and loss to transaction journals during every accounting period closure

Solution

Automation in place will help AR Admins capture the Foreign Exchange gain & losses (when operating legal entities currency is different than the corporate currency) leveraging the dated exchange rates as configured in the Org
Re-evaluation of account receivable balances at the end of Accounting Period will save a lot of time and effort for Accounting Admins

Impact

Measure the financial performance of an enterprise as FX Gain & Loss journal entries can be used on the income statements

Posted Invoice for

BHD 444.86 ($ 1,555.1)

Sept 20, 2025

Sept 26, 2025

Payment Received for

BHD 444.86 ($ 1,534)

Realized Loss of $21.10

1 USD = 0.286066 BHD

1 USD = 0.29 BHD

Accounts Receivable (Dr)	BHD 444.86
Deferred Revenue (Cr)	BHD 444.86

Cash (Dr)	BHD 444.86
Local Accounts Receivable (Cr)	BHD 444.86
Realized FX Loss (Dr)	USD 21.10
Corp Accounts Receivable (Cr)	USD 21.10

Settlement Event - Capture Realized FX Gain / Loss

188 of 846

GL Acct Summaries for �an Accounting Period

As part of the Accounting Period Closures

Revenue �Cloud Billing

Primary Persona(s)

Accounts Receivables Admin

Customer Need

Capture Opening and Closing balances for every Accounting Period

Solution

Automations to be put in place to capture Closing accounting balances during account period closure along with the accounting summaries for every general ledger account
Automations in place to copy the closed balance to open balance of the next accounting period�

Impact

Helps in tracking cash flow and Liquidity to evaluate business performance, credit risk management
Helps meet compliance with accounting standards

189 of 846

Salesforce Go for Revenue Cloud Advanced

190 of 846

Salesforce Go

Consistent & Automated set up experience

Customer Need

Today, admins have to go through a sequence of steps to get the RCA product set up. These steps have to be performed in a sequential manner and require multiple screen navigation. As a result, it is error prone and takes time and causes frustration to the admins to realize value.

Solution

Align the Revenue Cloud set up to the Salesforce Go framework

Use Cases

Set up initial org using one click base set up automation
Automation for Product Catalog Management, Pricing and Transaction Management
Enhanced Discovery through Videos, help articles to streamline onboarding process.�

Impact

Increased Designer/Admin productivity & Adoption

Progress status on each step

One-click�to turn on

Discovery videos

Revenue Cloud Advanced

191 of 846

Product Catalog

& Discovery

192 of 846

Category Based Faceted Search

Display facets on the list page immediately on selecting a category

Customer Need

Display relevant facets on click of a product category to filter products and view. Previously, relevant facets were displayed on the list page after a keyword search.

Solution / How To Configure

Display filters immediately on selection of a Category.
Configure filters in Index and Search Configuration and rebuild index to view facets corresponding to categories.

Use Case

As a user, when I select a specific Category (not ‘All Products’ node) on the Product List page, I want to view the corresponding filters so that I can use them to narrow down products within the category.

Impact

Improved User Experience
Enhanced Product Discoverability

Revenue Cloud Advanced

193 of 846

Setup Dynamic Product Facets & Limits

Higher facet limits and dynamically display most relevant facets

Customer Need

Filters are setup in a sequence. At runtime, first 10 filters are evaluated to determine the relevant filters to render for filtering. This limits rendering of relevant filters for a category or keyword search that are listed beyond sequence #10 and current limit of up to 10 facets at runtime is not met. Customer want to be able to view all the relevant filters for a category or keyword search up to the maximum allowed limit at runtime. Customer also want higher number of configurable facets.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable “Dynamic Product Facets” setting in Product Discovery to enable Auto Faceting. It is disabled by default.
When enabled, this feature will dynamically identify and display the most relevant filters for the actual products being shown on the product list page, rather than strictly adhering to a static sequence.
Support higher number of configurable filters/facets.

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, when browsing through category or searching products on Product List page, I want to view all the relevant filters available so that I can narrow down to the product I am looking for.

Impact

Enhanced User Experience & Satisfaction
Operational Efficiency

Revenue Cloud Advanced

194 of 846

Display order of categories

View categories in defined order in the Product Listing

Customer Need

Display of categories in Product Discovery as per the sort order defined in the Catalog Categories.

Solution / How To Configure

Specify a sort order number for categories. The Product Discovery feature will display them in ascending order based on this number.
If a sort order is not defined for a category, it will be sorted by its creation date, with the newest category appearing first.
If multiple categories have the same sort order number, they will also be sorted by their creation date, with the most recently created one listed first.

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, when I browse on Product List page, I want categories to be listed in the predefined sequence rather than the alphabetical order.

Impact

Control over product categories display order
Improved User Experience

Revenue Cloud Advanced

195 of 846

Custom Pricing in Product Discovery

Enabling dynamic product pricing through flexible procedure execution and custom logic integration.

Customer Need

Customers require the flexibility to define and execute qualification and pricing steps in a specific, ordered sequence within Product Discovery. This includes the ability to integrate custom logic via Apex actions, ensuring a consistent and tailored pricing experience across Product Discovery APIs..

Solution / How To Configure

Defined order of execution for Qualification and Pricing Procedures using Procedure plans.
Custom Apex invocations with sequence specified in Procedure Plan.
Creation of Procedure plan with validation for proper structuring, allowing one qualification section and multiple pricing/Apex action sections
Templates supporting adding and reordering multiple pricing sections.

Use Case

An Administrator needs to set up a new Product Discovery instance where pricing for certain products is handled by an external system via an Apex callout, and then configured pricing procedures are applied.

Impact

Enhanced Flexibility & Scalability
Improved Operational Efficiency

Revenue Cloud Advanced

196 of 846

Data Translation-Multilingual Search

Empower sellers/buyers view product data in their own language

Customer Need

Partners and customers want to view product information & search products in their own language other than english. Lack of it limits accessibility and efficiency for users in diverse linguistic regions. The inability to use local languages creates a poor user experience and can lead to lost business opportunities. Businesses require a solution that makes their Product Discovery and Catalog Management accessible to a global audience.

Solution / How To Configure

We are implementing a new feature that enables users to view and search products in their local language.

Term-Based Search: Users can enter text in their native language to search for both indexed and non-indexed products in the global search bar.
Faceted Search: Local language support is also extended to faceted search, allowing users to filter indexed products with greater precision.
View Product listing and details view additional languages�

Use Case

A partner's customer in Germany can search for "Laptop-Tasche" instead of "laptop bag," finding the exact product they need more quickly.
A support agent can quickly find information by searching for a product name in the local language of the customer they are assisting.�

Impact

Increased Accessibility & Globalisation: Open up your product catalog to a wider, global audience.
Improved User Experience: Provide a more intuitive and natural search experience that drives user satisfaction and engagement.

Revenue Cloud Advanced

197 of 846

Product Detail Caching

Accelerating product detail retrieval to enable faster configuration and quoting

Customer Need

Customers need fast and reliable access to product details to prevent slow loading times and improved user experience, especially when browsing frequently viewed products.

Solution / How To Configure�Caching layer to store and retrieve product details

Opt-in capability
On-demand/Scheduling of cache generation for all products using flows
Support for cache miss by automatically generating cache ensuring subsequent requests for that product are always fast.

Use Case

For a sales representative, getting instant access to product details to ensure a smooth and efficient configuration and quoting process

Impact

Improved performance

Revenue Cloud Advanced

198 of 846

Product Classification Hierarchy

Enabling classification hierarchy with attribute inheritance

Customer Need

Customers need an efficient way to create taxonomy of similar classifications along with attribute inheritance, and assign unique properties to specific sub-classifications. The objective is to simplify the administration of product classifications.

Solution / How To Configure

Define Product Classification hierarchy with attribute inheritance and management.
Add additional attributes to a sub-classification.
A Product which is based on a child Product Classification would inherit the attributes from same and its parent Product Classification.

Use Case

As catalog admin, I need to create a subclassification within a classification so that I can efficiently create a classification structure with inherited attributes and add additional attributes to product sub classifications.

Impact

Better management of classification taxonomy

Revenue Cloud Advanced

199 of 846

Product Centric Constraint Rules

Unified experience to manage and view Product Constraints

Customer Need

Maintain unified & consistent user experience for product definitions and constraints between Configurator and Product Catalog Management.

Solution / How To Configure�Enable catalog admins define & view rules in a Visual Builder or CML Editor directly from the product page, allowing for continuous validation and synchronization of constraints with the latest product data

Use Case

As a Catalog Admin, I want a seamless, unified experience to author and manage constraint rules tied to PCM catalog data and synchronized with CML, so that consistent product definitions and valid constraint rules are delivered to downstream systems

Impact

Consistent experience to manage product constraint rules
Inconsistencies detection and visibility between catalog data and CML rules when catalog data changes

Revenue Cloud Advanced

200 of 846

Price Management

201 of 846

Header Adjustment - Overall Discount

Dynamically distribute header discount to line items

Customer Need

Sales Reps want to apply a discount at the header and dynamically distribute it to the line items for calculation. Sales Reps need a temporary, overall discount that can be easily modified or removed at the header level.

Solution / How To Configure

Create constants in pricing procedure for NetUnitPrice, Override, Amount and Percentage.
Add Discount Distribution Service Pricing Element in Pricing Procedure and make necessary configurations. This should be last element in the procedure.

Use Case

Apply Header level Discount that is equally or proportionally distributed to all eligible line items.
Apply Header level discount percentage that is carried over to all eligible line items as is.
Set Target Quote Total by applying Override Total to fixed amount�

Impact

Sales Rep Efficiency

Revenue Cloud Advanced

202 of 846

Price Revision Element �(support for CPI uplifts)

Customer Need

Customers want the ability to implement price changes based on price indices like CPI. They need an ability to store the price index data and a framework to affect these changes via pricing procedure.

Solution / How To Configure

Index Rate entity included in pricing /RCA licenses to load the price index information
OOTB Decision table based on Index Rate entity- ensure to execute pricing sync or DT refresh
Price Revision policy to define the formula for price change (flat or Price Index based)
Price Revision element to apply the change based on relevant price index

Use Case

Businesses want to apply CPI based renewal uplifts, they also want the capability for a seller to negotiate the uplift / adjustment on top of CPI rate. The uplift will be applied against a line item in a transaction.

Impact

CPI based pricing strategy support OOTB

Revenue Cloud Advanced

203 of 846

Enhanced Pricing Performance on Large Transactions

Customer Need

After a full pricing call, runtime users (like Sales Reps) may make changes to a subset of line items requiring only those to be priced (delta pricing). This can lead to performance benefits especially if number of transaction line items is high.

Solution / How To Configure

In Setup → Revenue Cloud Revenue Settings page, enable “Delta Pricing for Quotes and Orders”.
This will enable Transaction system to differentiate the line items that got changed for subsequent pricing calls. This information is passed to pricing and used to price only the modified line items.

Define Constraints within the Product home page
Enable activation of Constraints

Use Case

View all the constraints associated with a given Product along with its structure and Attributes and activate them from a centralized location

Impact

Close synchronization between PCM and Constraints
Better Rules Administration

Revenue Cloud Advanced

208 of 846

Product recommendation rule

Recommend products based on predefined list

Customer Need

Surface product recommendations based on user selection

Solution / How To Configure

Create a rule using the recommend keyword. Recommendation rule can be part of a standalone product, a bundle, or a virtual container, for a type or relation.
Trigger the rule with an invocable action as part of a screen flow

Use Case

Recommend products based on pre-configured recommendation list
Recommend a powerful processor when a user chooses the performance server configuration�

Impact

Sales bottom line
Salesperson productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

209 of 846

Migration from BRE to CML Tool

Load constraint data from standard objects

Customer Need

Customers who started their RCA journey with business engine rules require an easy way to migrate their existing rules to constraints

Solution / How To Configure

Use the plugin-data plugin from https://www.npmjs.com/ to export rules from Business Rules Engine. Then, use the plugin-bre-to-cml plugin from the same source to convert the rules to CML and import the CML to Constraint Rules Engine.

Use Case

Migrate auto addition of warranty based on product quantity selection from BRE rules to CML constraint

Impact

Composability
Salesperson productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

210 of 846

Constraint Builder Enhancements

Flexible expression builder and grouping expressions

Customer Need

Admin users want to be able to combine AND/OR to join different expressions, when defining constraints

Solution / How To Configure

Expressions can be moved into, and be removed from Groups
New Groups can be created, just like new Expressions

Use Case

Define constraints with complex conditions that require different joins

Impact

Admin productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

211 of 846

Constraint Builder Enhancements

Constraint Summary

Customer Need

Admin users want to be able to define a descriptive name for constraints, so it can be easily viewed in the list view.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can provide a short description of the constraint that they are defining.
The description can be viewed in the summary when the card is collapsed

Use Case

Manage large number of constraints

Impact

Admin productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

212 of 846

Constraint Builder Enhancements

New Rule Template - Preference Rule

Customer Need

Admin users want to be able to set non-enforcing preference values based on certain conditions.

Solution / How To Configure

Define rules specifying the preferred values for a variable for certain conditions.
Users can override the preferred values set by the system during runtime.

Use Case

Set preferred value. Eg. 4K display is preferred when screen size is > 32 inches.

Impact

Enhanced Admin experience.
Admin productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

213 of 846

Constraint Builder Enhancements

New Rule Template - Exclude Rule

Customer Need

Admin users want to be able to define rules to exclude components from a bundle.

Solution / How To Configure

Define rules specifying the conditions under which a component must be excluded from the Bundle.
Excluded components will not be available for selection at runtime.

Use Case

Exclude printer paper from Printer Bundles when printer type is Laser.

Impact

Enhanced Admin experience.
Admin productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

214 of 846

Constraint Builder Enhancements

New Rule Template - Hide/Disable Rule

Customer Need

Admin users want to be able to define rules to hide or disable components, attributes, attribute values.

Solution / How To Configure

Define rules specifying the conditions under which to hide or disable components, attributes, attribute values.
Options will be hidden or disabled for user selection during runtime.

Use Case

Hide Warranty when Laptop is not selected

Impact

Enhanced Admin experience.
Admin productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

215 of 846

Transaction Management

216 of 846

Agentforce Quoting Template

Easy set up, with improved product search & quote management

Customer Need

Easy set up for agent actions

Solution / How To Configure

Create a new Agentforce Employee Agent instance from the new Quoting agent template, and add it under “Agent Access” in your sales rep permission sets.

You can move forward with all OOTB topics, or de-select topics if desired.

Use Case (Topics)

Quote Management Topic
Product Selection Topic
Consumption Management Topic (Pilot only: requires RCA + RCB)

Impact

Conversational quote creation, enhancing sales rep productivity, less administrative overhead

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Requires Agentforce SKU (self-provisionable)

217 of 846

Agentforce Quoting Topic

Easy set up, with improved product search & quote management

Customer Need

Sales reps spend too much time on administrative tasks while closing deals.

Solution / How To Configure

Create a new Agentforce Employee Agent instance from the new Quoting agent template, and add it under “Agent Access” in your sales rep permission sets.

With enhanced Quote Management topic, sales reps can update quote and line item fields, retrieve account asset details, and create renewal quotes for existing customers. Additionally, they can sync and unsync quotes and opportunities, and add term-defined products to quotes.

Use Case (Additional Agent Actions)

Create Renewal Quote
Update Quote Details, Update Quote Line Item Details
Get Assets for Account
Get Product Selling Model for Products, and support for adding term-defined default PSM products with Add Quote Line Item

Impact

Conversational quote creation, enhancing sales rep productivity, less administrative overhead

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Requires Agentforce SKU (self-provisionable)

218 of 846

Agentforce Product Selection Topic

Agentic topic and actions for product selection

Customer Need

Users often struggle to find specific products that meet their needs within large and complex catalogs. There is a need for a more interactive, conversational approach to guide users effectively through the product selection process infused with AI.

Solution / How To Configure

The Product Selection topic enables Sales Rep to search products in the Quoting Agent conversational experience.

Use Case (Agent Actions)

Find Products - Finds products that match the search term.
Get Product Details - Retrieves product details for filtering based on user input.

Impact

Conversational product discovery reduce search time, reduces training needs, and increases confidence in product selections for every quote.

Revenue Cloud Advanced

219 of 846

Ramp Deals For Groups with Consolidated Asset

Ramp entire quote with groups as logical time segments

Customer Need

Sales Reps wants to easily create and manage ramp deals with ramped and non-ramped elements co-existing on the same quote. Sales operations need a single, unified, consolidated view of a ramped product’s lifecycle to perform any lifecycle operations such as amendments & renewals

Solution / How To Configure

Enable “Ramp Deals for Groups in Quotes and Orders” from Revenue Settings
Create Quote with groups, edit group and set “Is Ramped” to True

Use Case

Create quote with 3 year deal where groups are organised by time segment (e.g. Year 1, 2, 3 etc.)
Prepare quote where ramped and non-ramped elements co-exist and are clearly distinguished
Once Ramped Order is Assetized, Consolidated asset is created for every ramped Order Line item.�

Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

220 of 846

Ramp Bundle Products with Group Ramp

For term defined bundle products as part of a multi-year deal

Customer Need

Sales Reps need the ability to add termed defined bundle products as part of the ramp deal and to configure different child configurations for each ramp segment.

Solution / How To Configure

Use Segment Level “Browse Catalog” to add a Bundle product, then select “Add to Current and Future segments”
Use “configure” to select different child, child attributes or quantities; these changes are forward propagated to all subsequent segments. �

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, I need to add a term defined bundle product to a 3 ramp deal and have different child configuration from year 2 onwards
“Implementation Support” is child of the bundle and should be only available in the 1st year, not in 2nd/3rd year. �

Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

221 of 846

Ramp Usage Products with Group Ramp

Enable selling of usage products as part of multi-year Ramp Deal

Customer Need

Sales Reps wants to sell usages based products as part of the multi-year ramp deal with ability to configure segment specific rate resources

Solution / How To Configure

Use Segment Level “Browse Catalogue” to add Usages product, on next screen select “Add to Current and Subsequent segments”
Use “Manage Usages Resources” to edit rates/grants ofs usages resources for specific ramped line from Segment.

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, I need to add Termed Defined Usage product to 3 year ramp deal and have different Usages Resources year 2 and year 3.
As a Sales Ops, I need to make changes to Usages Rates for year 3 by performing amendment to Ramped Usages Asset.�

Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

222 of 846

Ramp Deal -

Segment Specific Configuration

Enable configuration variation for ramped line segments

Customer Need

Sales Reps need the ability to have different product attribute values or bundle configuration for each ramp segment.

Solution / How To Configure

Open “Config” for the Ramp Line Segment, make changes and “Save” - when configuration changes are made, they are forward propagated to subsequent segments.

Use Case

As a Sales Rep, I need to add Dynamic Product to 4 year ramp deal, 1st year “Support Type” attribute value should be “Premium-Free” and 2nd Year onwards - “Basic - Free”.�

Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

223 of 846

Ramp Deal with Price Uplift

Allow Segment-specific Price Uplift for Group Ramp

Customer Need

Sales Reps wants ability to lock in price increase for future years upfront, by defining price uplifts to individual ramp segments. This allow them to offer predictable pricing for long duration deals.

Solution / How To Configure

Add “Unit Price Uplift” field to Quote line Editor
Clone Updated Pricing procedure to get the changes or modify your existing custom pricing procedure by creating new formula element for Uplift
Formula : “NetUnitPrice + NetUnitPrice * ItemUnitPriceUplift__std”
Output variable -> “NetUnitPrice”

Use Case

Create a 4 year ramp deal with pre-negotiated uplift percentage defined for year 3 and 4.

�Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

224 of 846

Amend ramped assets with groups

Enable Amend, Renew and Cancel Operation on Ramped Asset

Customer Need

Sales Reps/Ops wants ability to perform amendment, Renewal and Cancelation operation on the Ramped Asset. When making amendment they should be able to make changes qty, uplifts, attributes, configuration etc for the future segments

Solution / How To Configure

Amend & Cancellation : Select One Ramped Asset, Initiate Amendment or Cancellation
Renewal: Select one more Ramped Assets, Initiate Renew

Use Case

Amend “Slack” asset that was purchased for 4 year, so the upcoming segment’s qty can be increased and more discount can be provided for increased business.
Amend pre-negotiated uplift for current or future segments.
As Sales Rep, I want to Renew Ramped Asset for additional 3 Years

Impact

Increase revenue, Sales Rep Productivity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

225 of 846

Nested Groups

Organize and visualize your Quote/Order Lines efficiently

Customer Need

Certain business processes require dozens, hundreds or even thousands of lines on a single quote or order. Sales reps and Service agents requires an intuitive user experience and the end customers need a digestible proposal.

Proposed Solution

Ability for Sales Reps to show Nested Groups to indicate clear structural organization.

Use Cases

Create Nested Groupings up to 5 levels
Take actions at the nested child group level, such as adding products and discounts
Pass nested group structure to Order and proposal�

Impact

Sales Rep Productivity
Revenue Generation

Revenue Cloud Advanced

226 of 846

Preview Approvals

Advanced Approvals Enhancements

Customer Need

Customers need a preview of approvals for clarity before submitting quotes or transactions. This feature aids sales representatives and deal desk teams by clarifying activated approval rules, identifying approvers, and highlighting potential blockers. By offering this information upfront, the approval preview reduces uncertainty, minimizes revisions, and speeds up the deal process.

Solution / How To Configure

The Preview action enables users to review approval routing and logic before submitting a transaction. It can be used for quotes, orders, or any transaction needing a preview. Integrated within the Lightning App Builder (LAB), this feature can be easily added to page layouts for a seamless user experience.

Use Cases

Quote Discount Scenarios that undergo various levels of approvals

Impact

See approvers early – Know who will review before you submit.

Fix problems fast – Catch rule issues before they slow things down

Revenue Cloud Advanced

227 of 846

Split Quotes to Multiple Orders

Capture accurate Orders from Quotes

Customer Need

Order managers need the ability to create multiple Orders from a single Quote to manage their downstream Order processing.

Solution / How To Configure

Turn on ‘Advanced Order Creation From Quote’ from Revenue Settings
Specify a screen flow to use under ‘Set Up Flow for Creating Orders from Quotes’

Use Case

Create orders from each quote group
Create orders from a quote line field value

Impact

Revenue generation and customer success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

228 of 846

Import CSV to quote

Create a basic quote by importing from CSV

Customer Need

Sales reps needs a quick way to get started with a base quote through CSV file imports. Once the base quote is ready, sales reps should be able to make further changes to quote and share it with customer

Solution / How To Configure

User Permission Required : Advanced CSV Data Import
Enable - “Import Quote Line Items” from Revenue settings
Go to Setup -> Data Processing Engine, Save As “Create Quote Line Items from CSV File” and activate it.
Setup -> Revenue Settings -> Data Processing Engine Definition for Import Quote Line Items -> Select your cloned definition

Use Case

Customers wants their sales reps to prepare csv file with basic product information such as ProductCode, Quantity, Selling Model and import to Quote.
Sales Reps can initiate import by clicking on “Import Lines” on the Quote Record.

Impact

Customer Success, Sales Reps Productivity.

Revenue Cloud Advanced

229 of 846

Automatically co-terminate subscriptions to a contract end date

Simplify contract renewals in the future by aligning subscription end dates

Customer Need

Many companies have a best practice of co-terminating subscriptions within a contract, to ease future renewals

Solution / How To Configure

Expose ‘Contract Co-Termination’ field on Contract
Set ‘Contract Co-Termination’ to TRUE
Quotes/Order associated to this Contract now enforce subscription co-termination to contract end date

Use Case

As a sales rep, I need all subscriptions within a contract to end on the same day, so that come renewal time, I can process a contract renewal where the contract dates and all subscriptions within the contract line up nicely

Impact

Renewal Revenue Generation

Revenue Cloud Advanced

When this flag is checked, quotes and orders associated to this contract enforce subscription co-termination to contract end date

230 of 846

Transfer Assets From One Account to Another

Increase asset utilization by reallocating to where it’s needed

Customer Need

When a company has multiple accounts in the system, transfer assets from one account to another to shift resources to where they’re needed

Solution / How To Configure

Initiate an asset transfer as a type of amendment
Source quote/order against the source account and destination quote/order against the destination account are created for auditability

Impact

Customer Success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

231 of 846

Negotiate inflation adjusted renewal price uplifts

Maintain gross margins by increasing prices proportionately to the global markets

Customer Need

Negotiate a floating rate price uplift during initial sale

This is an enhancement to a Summer ‘25 feature, where �we built support for fixed rate price uplifts

Solution / How To Configure

Create Price Revision Policy rules (eg. US CPI)
Reps negotiate incremental delta (eg. US CPI + 5%)
At renewal time, uplift amount is computed based �on index value at the time

(eg. US CPI in July 2025 was 2.7%, so inflation �adjusted uplift = 7.7%)

Use Case

As a sales rep, I need to negotiate an x% price uplift on top of US CPI, so that my company maintains gross margins on a long term contract

Impact

Revenue Generation

Revenue Cloud Advanced

232 of 846

Specify Asset Lifecycle Date Times to the Second

Increased granularity on Asset Lifecycle Start/End Dates

Customer Need

Specify subscription start and dates to the second to accurately reflect when the subscription started and ended

Prior to this update, subscriptions started and ended at 00:00:00 GMT

Solution / How To Configure

Add Start Date Time, End Date Time, and Start and End Time Zone as displayed columns in the Transaction Line Editor

Use Case

As a sales rep, I need to specify subscription start and end dates to the minute, to accurately reflect exactly when customers received the service

Impact

Revenue Generation

Revenue Cloud Advanced

233 of 846

Grant subscription extensions via amendment

Amend subscription end dates, without the formality and semantics of a renewal

Customer Need

Sales reps need to grant courtesy extensions or lengthen a subscription end date, without calling that a renewal

Solution / How To Configure

Initiate amendment on termed subscription
Update end date
Activate order
Subscription gets extended

Impact

Revenue generation and customer success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Edit End Date within amendment to extend term

* Please note that this feature is not available with Invoice Management.

234 of 846

Issue field amendments and price amendments

Up until now, an amendment had to contain a quantity change or attribute change

Customer Need

Allow sales reps to update the price of an asset going forward

Update a non-price impacting field with the formality of an amendment order for auditability or compliance

Prior to Winter ‘26, an amendment had to contain a quantity change, attribute change, or bundle reconfiguration

Solution / How To Configure

No new organization preferences nor user permissions need to be updated

Sales reps simply initiate an amendment, and can update prices without updating quantities

Impact

Revenue generation and customer success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Update prices in an amendment without changing quantity, to change how much a customer will be charged going forward

235 of 846

Rollback a future amendment or renewal

Increased customer flexibility

Customer Need

Stay flexible to meet ever changing customer demands

Allow sales reps to reverse a future transaction, to allowing the customer to back out of a prior commitment

Solution / How To Configure

Initiate a rollback from the Managed Assets Viewer
Order is generated to maintain principle of auditability via transactions
Activating the order results in Asset Actions reflecting the rollback

Impact

Customer success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Pls note that this feature is not available with Invoice Management and DRO

236 of 846

Cumulative quantity enhancements

Maintain control over the sequence in which contract tier-based pricing gets applied

Customer Need

Customers expect contractual tier-based pricing to be applied in the right order based on their line item sequence.

Solution / How To Configure

Specify the field to use ‘Cumulative Quantity Pricing Sort Order Tag Configuration’

Use Case

Sales Reps like to create quote lines with quantity breaks that will fill each tier cleanly, so that the proposal presented to a customer shares the price breakdown for each quantity.

Impact

Customer adoption

Revenue Cloud Advanced

237 of 846

Deep Clone Quotes and Orders

Expedite Quote and Order creation with deep clone

Customer Need

Sales reps need the ability to clone quotes and orders, including related entities like quote line items and order products.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable ‘Clone Quotes and Orders’ under Revenue Settings
Add the ‘Deep Clone’ button to the Quote or Order page layout

Use Case

Sales reps need to share multiple iterations of a Quote, which may require cloning the Quote and then modifying certain products.�

Impact

Improved usability and efficiency
Revenue generation

Revenue Cloud Advanced

238 of 846

Bulk Delete in Quotes and Orders

Delete multiple line items or groups in one go

Customer Need

Sales reps need the ability to remove multiple quote line items, order products, groups, or subgroups in a single action.

Solution / How To Configure

In the Transaction Line Editor or Sales Transaction Line Editor, select a line item or group, and then click Bulk Delete.

Use Case

Delete multiple line items or groups in a quote or order at the same time�

Impact

Improved usability and efficiency

Revenue Cloud Advanced

239 of 846

Enhanced Usage Selling

240 of 846

New Usage Resources Modal

A new modal view of grants, rates, and policies for the resources

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

Salespeople need quick and clear visibility into grants, rates, and policies for usage resources.

Solution

A Resource Modal accessible from quote/order/asset. The modal will display product details (e.g., product, quantity, dates) and show all relevant resources, rates, and policies. Display rates for various commitment product types.

Use Case

A salesperson can navigate from a quote/order/asset to the "Resources" modal and easily view all relevant grants, rates, and policies for the resources. This helps understand pricing and terms instantly. One can quickly see how commitment product rates apply.

Impact

Enables faster, more informed decision-making. Improves efficiency during quote/order creation.

241 of 846

ARC Enhancements For Resources

Amendment, renewal and cancellation of usage assets

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

Ability to amend, renew and cancel usage assets while changing the rates and grants of usage resources.

Solution

Extend ARC capabilities beyond products line-items to the usage resources.

Use Case

Negotiate resource rates during amendments
Negotiate resource grants during amendments

Impact

Customers can now negotiate and amend rates and grants of the usage based products sold to their customers.

242 of 846

Binding Enhancements (Rates)

Selection of winner rates during target binding

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

An ability to add new anchors/pack to an existing binding target already carrying rates for the resources

Solution

Support for rate negotiation and winning rate selection when binding anchors/packs to an existing target or tenant.
Displaying rates based on the binding target.

Use Case

View target rates
View and edit catalog rates
The cheapest and the latest rate override the target rates

Impact

Consolidates applicable rates across an account, contract, or custom entity
Helps users identify a winning rate when adding a new asset

243 of 846

Group Ramps for Usage Products

Selling of usage products as part of multi period group ramp deals

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

Sales person needs to create/amend ramp deals containing usage products under the ramp group

Solution

Support rates and quantity changes for usage products across ramp segments
Support single asset creation for usage products through group ramp (multiple ASPs)
Support amendment, renewal and cancellation of Ramped Usage Asset

Use Case

New sale: Sell usage products under ramp deals with variations of quantity and rates across ramp segments (single asset)
Amendment, Renewal & Cancellation operations on usage product asset, with ability make changes to quantities and rates for resources

Impact

Offer multi period ramp deals for usage products and offer better pre negotiated deals during selling

244 of 846

New Binding Target View

Consolidated view rates

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

A consolidated view of all usage related information about a binding target which can be an asset, account, contract or a custom entity

Solution

Introducing new rates which are winning rates

Use Case

Salesperson and account manager to view applicable rates

Impact

Offer a consolidated, easy to use, presentation of the state of an account’s rate

245 of 846

Design and Sell Quantity Commitments

Customer Need

Customers use commitments to manage predictability of usage consumption and also leverage the commitment to negotiate lower rates. Customers sometimes wish to commit Quantity in return for negotiated discounts.

Solution

Define commitment products by specifying quantities on resources
Have associated grants , rates & policies clearly defined.
Customers may negotiate the commit quantity, term and rates.
Commitments are billed for the resources procured and the overages on anchors are billed separately. �

Use Cases

Customer purchases specific quantity of resources with defined terms and rates and track usage against this commitment .
The Commitments are attached to the anchor products to pass on the discounts and rates
If usage is within the commitment value,customer is not charged for overage. If usage exceeds the commitment value, the customer is charged an overage based on the agreed rates.�

Impact

Enable customers to Commit in Quantity and negotiate rates for a win-win business engagement

Revenue Cloud Advanced

246 of 846

Design and Sell Monetary Commitments

Customer Need

Customers use commitments to manage predictability of usage consumption and also leverage the commitment to negotiate lower rates. Customers sometimes wish to commit Monetary Value ($) in return for negotiated discounts.

Solution

Define commitment product by specifying certain Monetary Value
Have associated grants, rates & policies clearly defined.
Customers may negotiate the commit value, term and rates.
Commitments are billed for the resources procured and the overages on anchors are billed separately. �

Use Cases

Customer purchases a monetary amount of resources with defined terms and rates and track usage against this commitment .
The Commitments are attached to the anchor products to pass on the discounts and rates
If usage is within the commitment value,customer is not charged for overage. If usage exceeds the commitment value, the customer is charged an overage based on the agreed rates.�

Impact

Enable customers to Commit for a monetary value and negotiate rates for a win-win business engagement.

Revenue Cloud Advanced

247 of 846

Dynamic Revenue Orchestration

248 of 846

Schedule orch steps on a preferred date

Future date Steps - Custom Dates

Customer Need

To accurately model real-world business processes, customers need the ability to schedule and delay tasks based on a wider range of critical event dates. Relying solely on the 'Order Line Start Date' or the 'Previous Step Execution Date' creates rigid workflows that restrict the achievement of unique operational milestones�

Solution / How To Configure

Configure Custom Date from Context (OLIs and FOLIs)
Map custom context tag with the custom date
Select the custom tag while configuring future dated task setting in Fulfillment Step Definition.�

Use Case

Start processing delivery on customer preferred date

Impact

Flexibility and ease of designing orchestration plans for designers

IOM parity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

249 of 846

Orchestrate transfer of Assets b/w Accounts

Asset Transfer

Customer Need

When a company has multiple accounts in the system, transfer assets from one account to another to shift resources to where they’re needed

Solution / How To Configure

Configure Plans with Scenarios for Amend and Cancel
Initiate Asset Transfer and submit the activated orders to DRO

Use Case

Orchestrate provisioning of orgs for the recipient account
Activate/enable user licenses for the recipient account

Impact

Customer Success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

250 of 846

Orchestrate orders with multi period group ramp orders and multi-tenant orders

Custom Decomp & Orch Scopes

Customer Need

To orchestrate an order with multi period group ramp decomposed fulfillment lines should be able to group order lines per ramp id or group id, etc.

Solution / How To Configure

Create Custom scopes in the Set Up
Select custom scope for technical products and fulfillment steps definitions

Use Case

Orchestrate group ramp orders, manage fulfillment orders per group.
Orchestrate orders with where each SKUs is provisioned at a different tenant

Impact

Customer Success

Revenue Cloud Advanced

251 of 846

Control role of technical attributes in decomposition and fulfillment assets

Configure Product Attribute Scopes

Customer Need

Some attributes values on fulfillment lines are relevant during orchestration of the order only, hence need not be assetized to keep the fulfillment assets lean.

Some attributes on fulfillment assets should not drive the outcome of the decomposition for asset based orders.

Solution / How To Configure

Assign Product Attribute Scope to Product Attributes

Use Cases

Use attributes in technical products to capture orchestration specific data only, that are not relevant after plan completion.
Prevent fulfillment attributes from influencing fulfillment actions during order decomposition.

Impact

Customer Success

IOM Feature Parity

Revenue Cloud Advanced

252 of 846

Skip redundant steps before orchestrating amendment of Subscription dates

Extendable FLOW to check and act on pending steps

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Customer Need

When the end customer requests for either Pull In or Push Out of an order line item’s start dates via an order but the previous order’s orchestration is not completed. In such a case, tasks scheduled as per previous order become irrelevant and the corresponding tasks need to be executed as per revised start date.

Solution

Enhance plan generation logic to check and give customers the option to override the fulfillment step waiting to be executed in a future date.

Use Cases

Before handle pending steps from original order before submitting a pull in/push out request to DRO.

Impact

Simplified ARC operations with DRO sequencing plan execution on assets

253 of 846

CME Managed Package�- DRO Interoperability

Pilot Release

Customer Need

OM+ customers ( Telstra, TA, Belong) reaching end of support in FY26
Eventually, use the interop path to:

Migrate OM standard customers to DRO, ensuring a clear roadmap and preventing attrition
End the sale of OM standard, so new CME customers can use DRO instead

Solution

Use EPC as catalog
Configure Decomposition Rules in DRO to replicate DRs present in IOM; including attribute mapping and conditions.
Configure Orchestration in DRO, that includes- Plans, Steps (including conditions), Dependencies, Callouts, Integrations,Queues,Task Assignment Rules, Fallout Rules, Jeopardy Rules.
Submit CME CPQ orders to DRO
View and Monitor Order Decomposition and Fulfillment plans in DRO �

Use Case

Managed Package customers can use DRO to fulfill orders and get access to new features and improved scalability

Impact

DRO Adoption for net new and existing IOM customers
End of Sale for IOM (OM Std)

Revenue Cloud Advanced

254 of 846

Salesforce Contracts & Document Generation

255 of 846

Data True Up

Keep your Contract document and Record in sync

Customer Need

Many a times data in the contract records and document are not in sync as both are getting updated in parallel. This gives rise to misreporting and various inconsistencies which may lead to loss of revenue and legal issues.

Solution / How To Configure

RevCloud Customers can enable Data True up by turning on the “Data True Up” Preference from Docgen Feature Settings. User must have MS-Addin configured and Accessible. User must have salesforce contracts licenses. The token which needs to be true upped must be prefixed with DT_ and also the relevant context mappings or DRs need to be available.

Use Case

The data at the contract record level gets updated from various sources, even after the document is already submitted for internal or external reviews. Data true up helps you update the latest values on the document or vice versa there by keeping both record and document in sync

Impact

Data true up allows customers to be able to do the following:

Eliminate data inconsistencies
Accurate Reporting and Tracking
Prevents legal complications

Revenue Cloud Advanced

Write back

Sync

256 of 846

MS 365 add-in performance�/UI improvement

Improved add-in load time and user experience

Customer Need

The microsoft add-in used by customers to pull in salesforce data and document editing was taking a significant amount of time to load the content and perform the operations like content editing, insertion of new content and fetching of content etc.

Solution / How To Configure

We have made significant changes to the UI to distribute the content more evenly. The content like sections, clause and tokens resides within the document as content controls. Each content control has a unique id which helps us in deriving and performing various operations within the document. Significant changes have been made to the content manipulation logic to perform user based actions much faster. No additional configurations or licenses are needed to get these new enhancements.

Use Case

Users load the content like clauses, tokens and sections on the add-in and perform various operations like insertion, replacement, editing or deletion using the add-in. Faster load times and seamless editing elevates user experience and improves usability

Impact

Reduced the data load time by over 90% to improve the usability of the add-in.
Enhanced user experience

Revenue Cloud Advanced

257 of 846

Elevated MS 365 privileges for SF Contracts

Establish the integration without the need of elevated access

Customer Need

Earlier to establish an integration with microsoft customers needed to provide elevated access like global admin, user admin, user.readwrite.all, files.readwrite.all etc. This got highlighted in the org wide security reviews and used to complicate the security approvals for the customers

Solution / How To Configure

Create a test user say CLM Tester without Global Admin Permission

Create a Connect App and Sharepoint using the CLM Tester user and the new Api permissions (offline_access openid User.Read User.ReadBasic.All Sites.Read.All Sites.Selected Mail.Send).

Using Graph Explorer provide write access to the sharepoint site for the connected app

Complete guided setup for integrating MS 365 with the Salesforce Org. Includes creating Auth Provider and Named Creds

Perform Redlining/editing/reviews using test MS 365 add in from contracts page.

Use Case

Customers would be establish end to end integration without needing to provide any elevated (e.g. edit/write) related privileges

Impact

Improves Customer adoption

Lesser time to value (faster implementation)

Revenue Cloud Advanced

258 of 846

Salesforce DocGen Community Support

Revenue Cloud Customers can now generate documents in Community Portals

Customer Need

Customers have been long looking for Document Generation capability in Digital Experience Community portals- Customer Community (CC), Customer Community Plus (CC+)and Partner Community (PC). This capability is now enabled for RevCloud customers in this release.

Solution / How To Configure

RevCloud Customers can follow detailed setup information given in the help docs for configuring community portal with CC/CC+ and PC users. The required DocGen community licenses are part of the Salesforce Digital Experience Cloud User licenses.

Use Case

Customers can enable document generation on demand for any use case and make it available for end users via community portal (Digital Experience Cloud portal). There could be myriad customer use cases including generation of invoices on demand, quotes on demand, proposal documents etc.

Impact

High CSAT as it allows customers to create bespoke solution to address some of their key use cases allowing document generation by the end users (digital experience users) ��Note: This is related to Document Generation and NOT DocBuilder capability.

Revenue Cloud Advanced

259 of 846

Salesforce DocGen using Context Services

Alternative to Omnistudio Data Mappers

Customer Need

Entire RevCloud uses Context services for data hydration, data sharing and data persistence. Document Generation so far depends on omni data mappers for mapping of Salesforce object data. There is a need for customers to use one single approach to handle data aspects. Hence, DocGen to support Context Services as an alternative to Omni Data Mappers.

Solution / How To Configure

RevCloud customers could configure either omni data mappers (omni licenses are already part of RCA/RCB) or Context services (no additional licenses) for mapping purposes. The Context services configuration for DocGen are same as they are used in other RevCloud configurations. Salesforce Document Generation Template Designer (Core DocGen template) has additional provision to choose either omni data mappers or context services mapping and continue to generate documents through the existing mechanisms.

Use Case

Document Generation with context services could potentially be substituted for all Omni based Document Generation.

Impact

No additional need to learn new tool Omni for data mapping purposes. In addition, the scale limitations of Omni could be overcome on certain cases through context services

Note: Context Services can be used only in Salesforce Document Generation Template Designer (Core DocGen designer) and NOT in DocGen Designer available part of Omnistudio package. The DocGen license remains same and it is part of RCA/RCB

Revenue Cloud Advanced

260 of 846

Service Cloud

261 of 846

Digital Engagement

262 of 846

Agentforce Connections Improvements

Deliver rich appointment experiences with an Agentforce Agent

Customer Need

Previously, AgentForce conversations were limited to plain text, making interactions less engaging and interactive. Customers now expect seamless, visually engaging experiences on our messaging channels.

Streaming Token Validation (Agentforce)

Ensure the accuracy of AI-generated content

Customer Need

Customers need to ensure the quality and accuracy of AI-generated content. They require a way to prevent the publication of responses that are factually incorrect, nonsensical, or inappropriate. The ability to automatically validate these responses before they go live is critical for maintaining brand reputation and user trust.

Solution / How To Configure

Automatic with Agentforce generated content.

Use Case

An e-commerce company uses an ASA bot to respond to product inquiries for thousands of items daily. They want to make sure the descriptions are accurate and don't contain any false information about materials or features.

Impact

Improved Accuracy: Drastically reduces the number of factually incorrect or nonsensical AI-generated responses that reach your customers.

Enhanced Efficiency: Automates the quality control process, freeing up your team from manually reviewing every response. This allows them to focus on higher-value tasks.

Increased Brand Trust: By consistently providing high-quality, reliable information, you build greater confidence and trust with your audience. This helps maintain your brand's reputation as a reliable and credible source.

Agentforce and �UE or EE + DE

Agentforce

270 of 846

Third Party Messaging Channels

271 of 846

WhatsApp Flows Improvements

Seamless interactions, guided every step of the way

Customer Need

Businesses need an intuitive way to guide customers through structured interactions in WhatsApp, simplifying tasks like booking, data collection, and support—enhancing efficiency and engagement.

Solution / How To Configure

Leveraging the existing Form Messaging Component type, admins can now choose to create an Apex based Form component no longer requiring a Global Action. Once they create the WhatsApp Flow format, they will be able to add the content right from within the builder including multiple questions (up to 3) per page.

Use Case

A doctor's office can use WhatsApp Flows to streamline pre-check-in by sending patients a guided Flow to complete essential details before their visit. This reduces wait times, minimizes paperwork, and ensures a smoother check-in process—all within the convenience of WhatsApp.

Impact

WhatsApp Flows automate workflows, reduce manual effort, and enhance customer satisfaction, leading to faster resolutions and a seamless experience within a trusted messaging channel.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

272 of 846

Triggered Outbound on Enhanced Facebook

Automate outbound updates and alerts on Enhanced Facebook

Customer Need

Previously, customers on Enhanced Facebook Messenger could not send automated, triggered outbound messages. This feature parity gap meant that critical, proactive communications like shipping updates or appointment reminders had to be sent manually or not at all, leading to service gaps and a disconnected customer journey.

Solution / How To Configure

This enhancement closes the feature gap, allowing you to send triggered outbound messages on Enhanced Facebook.

First, create a Notification message component with a Media Format that is supported by Facebook. Once the Notification component is active, it can be referenced in the Send Conversation Message flow action to trigger the outbound message automatically.�

Use Case

A retail company wants to proactively inform a customer that their order has shipped.

Impact

By enabling automated outbound messaging, businesses can improve agent efficiency by eliminating the need to manually send routine updates. This allows agents to focus on more complex conversations. Furthermore, it improves overall customer satisfaction by delivering timely, proactive information directly within the messaging thread.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

273 of 846

Troubleshoot Faster with the

Enhanced Messaging Log

Get actionable insights into your outbound messaging traffic

Customer Need

Administrators lacked a self-service way to diagnose why outbound messages failed on Enhanced Channels. This led to lengthy troubleshooting and uncertainty, unlike the visibility available for standard channels.

Solution / How To Configure

A new Enhanced Messaging Log is now available in Setup. It lists all triggered outbound messages, allowing admins to drill into specific failures to see the root cause (e.g., an unapproved WhatsApp template)

Use Case

An admin sees appointment reminders are failing on WhatsApp. They can now go directly to the Enhanced Messaging Log, identify the specific error (e.g., "ApprovedExternalTemplateRequired"), and take immediate action to resolve the issue.

Impact

This log provides actionable insights that dramatically decrease troubleshooting time. By quickly resolving errors, admins improve the reliability of automated communications and ensure a more consistent customer experience.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

Gov Cloud Plus +DE

UE & EE + DE

274 of 846

Standard Channel EOL (Facebook & SMS)

Inform customers in their move off of our legacy Facebook & SMS Channel

Customer Need

With the upcoming EOL for standard Facebook and SMS on February 14th, 2026, customers need clear, in-app guidance to ensure a smooth migration. In-product banners will inform them of the change and provide simple instructions for a seamless transition.

Solution / How To Configure

In-product banners that will appear within the user interface for customers with active standard Facebook and/or SMS channels. These banners will notify users of the upcoming EOL and provide a link to our help documentation for further details.

Use Case

A customer using a standard SMS channel logs into the platform and sees a banner notifying them of the upcoming EOL. The banner provides a clear call to action, directing them to migration resources.

Impact

In-product banners keep customers informed and prepared for EOL, reducing disruption and streamlining migration with clear, in-context guidance.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

275 of 846

WhatsApp Local Storage

Control the location of data storage for your WhatsApp channel

Customer Need

Meta’s default data storage location is the United States. This was aligned with the data storage and governance requirement of our customers. They needed a way of changing the location of storage for their data.

Solution / How To Configure

Salesforce has enabled a data residency setting on the messaging channel setting page. Business admins will be able to select the location of data storage from a list of available geographies with Meta.

Use Case

A business wants to make sure their customer data is stored in France. They can select France as the location of data storage from their channel setting page for WhatsApp.

Impact

Businesses can onboard quicker when their data strategies and governance policies are supported by Salesforce.

UE or EE + DE

UE & EE + DE

276 of 846

Interactive button templates for WhatsApp

Support WhatsApp templates with a button interactive element

Customer Need

Businesses want to send outbound template messages with buttons to their end users. These buttons can be used direct customers to specific URL, copy code, call a service number and quick replies.

Solution / How To Configure

Salesforce supports importing the approved messaging template created in the business’s WhatsApp business manager. This can be done using the external template format in the notification messaging component.

Use Case

A business can send a promotional message using interactive templates. In this message the end user can copy the promotional code with a single tap of the “copy code” button. They can also have another button in the message to redirect them to to the product information web page.

Impact

Businesses can support a richer messaging experience for their end users on WhatsApp channel.

UE & EE + DE

277 of 846

List Selector Enhancements for WhatsApp

Add subtitle for the list selector options

Customer Need

Businesses want to send list picker options with the ability to add description for their options.

Solution / How To Configure

Salesforce enhanced the list picker format with an additional field to add subtitle descriptions.

Use Case

A business can send production options and description about the product in a list picker format.

Impact

Businesses can support a richer messaging experience for their end users on WhatsApp channel.

UE & EE + DE

278 of 846

Streamlined Setup for 3rd Party Messaging

Introducing auto-responses, inactivity timer, and a unified channel setup experience.

Customer Need

Admins faced several challenges when configuring 3rd party channels. Key automation features like inactivity timers and auto-response components were unavailable, requiring manual agent work. The setup process itself was also disjointed with inconsistent UIs (a modal vs. a record page).

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can now configure an inactivity timer to mark sessions inactive and use messaging components for automated replies on 3rd party channels. To further improve workflow, admins can directly navigate to the correct Omni-Channel Flow from the setup page via a new hyperlink.

Use Case

An admin setting up a WhatsApp channel can now set an inactivity timer so agents don't have to manually update the session. They select a pre-built component for auto-responses instead of typing free-form text. They can also save time by clicking a hyperlinked flow name to navigate directly to it.

Impact

This update brings feature parity to 3rd party channels, improves agent efficiency through automation, and reduces administrative overhead with a simpler setup process.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

Gov Cloud Plus +DE

UE & EE + DE

279 of 846

Core as Source of Truth for Enhanced SMS

Streamline SMS number provisioning, activation and management via a self service experience

Customer Need

Today, when provisioning SMS channels, customers need to submit support cases for provisioning, activating and deactivating SMS channels. Furthermore, there is also no way to manage Sandbox to Production (and vice-a-versa) number movement.

Solution / How To Configure

SMS procurement is now supported only on production orgs. Go to setup, procure SMS number via the self service UI, provision and activate a SMS channel and seamlessly migrate the channel to your Sandbox org for testing. A SMS channel can be active only in 1 org at a time. Supported for US and Canada numbers only.

Use Case

An admin user now requests brand/ campaigns, requests 10DLC and Toll free numbers; tracks the code status and once approved provisions and activates them as channels - from within setup itself. The Admin then migrates the channel to a Sandbox org for testing, completes testing and migrates the channel back to production - all without requiring to submit a support case. �

Impact

This drastically minimizes the time, costs and effort associated with SMS number procurement, management and testing.

UE & EE + DE

280 of 846

Bring Your Own Channel

281 of 846

Agentforce - �Proactive Messages for BYOC

Agentforce can send the initial message to end-users

Customer Need

Agentforce no longer needs to wait for an initial inbound message from an end-user to respond. A BYO conversation can now be routed go an Agentforce Agent immediately (e.g., as soon as end-user visits a service portal) and initiate the conversation with the end-user.

Solution / How To Configure

Requires CCaaS partner integration. Once integrated by the partner, the feature can be enabled through an Omni Flow.

Use Case

A Financial Service customer wants Agentforce to introduce itself and offer help to an end-user as soon as they visit a self-service portal and click the chat icon.

Impact

A must-have feature for Agentforce to compete effectively with partner agents.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE + Agentforce

Agentforce and �UE or EE + DE

Agentforce

282 of 846

Agentforce - �Progress Indicators for BYOC

Agentforce can provide real-time updates on response progress

Customer Need

Agentforce can now provide real-time updates on its progress for generating an response & answer to the end-user (e.g. Agent is thinking, Agent is taking action, Agent is typing, etc.). This will provide the end-user with greater confidence that something is happening, and that Agentforce is responding in a timely manner.

Solution / How To Configure

Requires CCaaS partner integration. Once integrated by the partner, the feature will be enabled automatically for customers using Agentforce through BYOC.

Use Case

A health care customer wants Agentforce to provide progress indicators for its responses so that it gives the impression that it’s performant and responsive.

Impact

A must-have feature for Agentforce to compete effectively with partner agents.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

Agentforce and �UE or EE + DE

Agentforce

283 of 846

Markdown support for BYOC

Agentforce & Service Reps can use rich text markdown

Customer Need

Provides the ability for service reps and Agentforce to send richer text messages with bold, italics, underlines, bullet points, numbered lists, & hyperlinks so that the messages are more legible and easier to digest.

Solution / How To Configure

Requires CCaaS partner integration. Once integrated by the partner, the feature will be enabled automatically for customers. Agentforce will send rich text messages, and service reps can also type messages in markdown that will appear as rich text to the end-user.

Use Case

A service rep wants to provide a numbered list to the end-user of steps they took to resolve an issue, along with a hyperlink to a knowledge article with more info.

Impact

A must-have feature so that BYO Partners can provide the same rich text capabilities they do with their own native experiences for their channels.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE +DE

Agentforce and �UE or EE + DE

Agentforce

284 of 846

Customer Inactivity Warning for BYOC

Warn end-users that their session will expire due to inactivity

Customer Need

Provides the ability to send an automated warning to an end-user that their session is about to be inactivated due to their inactivity, letting them know how much more time they have left.

Solution / How To Configure

In addition to setting the Inactivity Timeout, customers can now also add an auto-response message component in their custom channel settings, and configure when they want the message sent.

Use Case

A retail customer wants to warn customers before their sessions will go inactive, so they don’t end abruptly

Impact

An important end-user experience feature for customers. The Inactivity Timeout setting is not very usable without it.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

285 of 846

Service Email

286 of 846

Agentforce Connections for Service Email

Deliver Context-Aware, Personalized Responses

Markdown Support on

Enhanced Conversation Component

Service Reps can leverage markdown while using enhanced conversations

Customer Need

Service reps need to see exactly what their customers see. This ensures all rich formatting from inbound messages is preserved, allowing reps to fully understand the context and intent behind every customer message. Service Reps also have the ability to leverage markdown syntax when responding to end-users in supported channels like Messaging In App and Web.

Solution / How To Configure

No configuration need, automatically updated when using supported Enhanced Conversation channels.

Use Case

A Customer Service Rep can read inbound messages from their customers in rich formatting to better understand the context and intent.

Impact

Creating a better messaging experience for Service Reps by ensuring all rich formatting on inbound messages are preserved so they can better support their customer by fully understanding the context and intent.

Enterprise and Unlimited editions with the Digital Engagement add-ons

UE & EE + DE

291 of 846

Service Cloud Voice

292 of 846

Multiparty Calls for Amazon Connect

Allow up to 6 participants in a group call

Customer Need

This feature allows up to six people to participate simultaneously in a call.

Solution / How To Configure

As this is a pilot, it requires the customer to work with their account team and request to be nominated to this pilot.

Use Case

For customer service teams in industries like travel or emergency services who require more than three participants on a call. This feature allows up to six people to participate simultaneously, while also enabling agents to initiate separate consultations with other parties. This is crucial for scenarios like booking complex travel itineraries with multiple travelers or coordinating emergency response efforts with agents, translators, and the caller.

Impact

By facilitating seamless communication and collaboration between all involved parties, Multi-Party Conferencing enhances efficiency, improves customer satisfaction, and ensures critical information is shared effectively.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

Pilot

NOTE: Multiparty for BYOT is already available, and depends on partners to support it

293 of 846

Phone Type Select for Amazon Connect

Set Softphone as the Default Phone Type

Customer Need

This feature empowers administrators to control the phone type (Softphone or Deskphone) agents can use within the Omni Channel environment.

Solution / How To Configure

Under Contact Center Details, an administrator can set the default Phone Setting to Softphone

Use Case

Ensure that phone agents are not able to change their phone type to deskphone and with that forward calls to an external numbers when they work in a regulated environment.

Impact

Ensures regulatory compliance by restricting agents to approved phone types. Simplifies compliance management by providing centralized control over phone type settings. Reduces the risk of non-compliant agent behavior.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

Beta

294 of 846

Keyboard Shortcuts

Manage calls using the keyboard

Customer Need

Allowing agents to accept work items (calls, messages) in Omni-Channel using keyboard shortcuts.

Solution / How To Configure

As an agent, within Omni open the settings tab, and click Configure Keyboard Controls which will provide the user the ability to set keyboard shortcuts

Use Case

By reducing time spent on navigating and clicking, agents can focus on what matters most: providing customer service.

Impact

Ensures timely acceptance of work, maximizing agent efficiency. Provides tools that better support agent workflows.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

295 of 846

Multi URL Connector

Allow partners to provide multiple connector URLs

Customer Need

Partners express the need to be able to package their Service Cloud Voice connector with the ability to set multiple URLs. By allowing the partner to set multiple URLs, one package can now be used by customers that have different endpoints.

Solution / How To Configure

BYOT Partners need to implement support for this in their package. Once this is done, during the initial setup, there will be a dropdown showing the various URLs, or with an existing Service Cloud Voice setup there is a Update Connector URL button on the Contact Center Details Page.

Use Case

The BYOT Partner package can serve customers across the world with needs to have a different URL to ensure that the geographical closest endpoint is chosen. By allowing the partner to set multiple URLs, one package can now be used to serve this purpose. �

Impact

This enhancement will improve the flexibility and scalability of a BYOT Connector, including adding the ability of redundancy.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

296 of 846

Delegated Admins for Service Cloud Voice

Give delegated admins the ability to administrate users

Customer Need

Enables delegated admins to create and manage contact center agents and supervisors, streamlining user administration and reducing reliance on system admins.

Solution / How To Configure

In Salesforce Setup, an admin can assign an App Permission called “Delegated Contact Center Admin” to a permission that can be assigned to a delegated admin.

Use Case

Currently, full system admin access is required to manage agents and supervisors. This creates bottlenecks, slows down onboarding, and hinders operational agility, especially for organizations with strict access controls or geographically dispersed teams.

Impact

Customers benefit indirectly through improved contact center efficiency. Faster agent onboarding and streamlined user management translate to quicker response times and potentially better service experiences.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

NOTE: In the current release, there are still some limitations. Review our Help Docs on this feature

297 of 846

Customize Transfer Destinations with Omni-Channel Unified Routing

Make every transfer fast, accurate, and effortless for your reps.

Customer Need

Reps waste time searching through long lists of all the available agents and queues to find transfer target for Omni Unified Routing as of today.

Solution / How To Configure

Configure transfer destination lists within Omni-Channel Presence Configuration.�Choose to show all queues/profiles or a curated subset.

Use Case

Contact center wants reps to transfer billing calls only to Billing Support, not general service.
New-hire reps see only a limited set of transfer options to reduce errors.
Specialized teams (e.g., Premium Support) only appear for eligible transfers.

Impact

Standardized configuration across all the channels. Save admin times. Improve agent efficiency by scoping down the transfer target tailor to their business needs.Better customer experience with quicker resolution.

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

298 of 846

Route VoiceCall using Omni-Channel

Enhance Your Experience with Omni-Channel: Seamlessly Route Voice Calls and Salesforce Channels with Features Like Skill-Based Routing

Customer Need

Previously, Service Cloud Voice relied on Amazon Connect for voice call routing, which had a 20-second limit for call acceptance. Skill-based routing was not available as well. Additionally, the blended agent experience was not always seamless, as it required using both Omni-Channel and Amazon Connect as routing engines, leading to potential edge case.

Solution / How To Configure

Require to enable Enhanced Omni-Channel first. Then configure Service Cloud Voice routing within Salesforce.

Scope: inbound, outbound, transfer (agent and queue transfer), deskphone, voicemail (limited)

Use Case

For example, a service representative can now handle both cases and voice calls simultaneously by leveraging Omni-Channel routing. This includes advanced capabilities such as skill-based routing and interruptible capacity, enabling more efficient and effective blended agent use cases handling.

Impact

Admin Productivity, Agent productivity, CSAT

Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate Editions

*GA for Amazon Contact Center for inbound, outbound, transfer, deskphone and voicemail support, GA in the middle of Summer ‘25

299 of 846

Enhanced High Volume Amazon Outbound Campaigns

Supercharge outreach with proactive engagement with high volume outbound dialing with predictive and progressive campaigns for Amazon Connect and SCV

Customer Need

Amazon Outbound Campaigns replace Amazon Pinpoint for a more native solution directly in Amazon Connect. The new solution includes updated permissions enabling Predictive and Progressive Dialing, Customer Profile segments to enrich outbound voice capabilities.

Customer Need

Customers want flexible, configurable mechanisms to meet internal goals, entitlements, or service-level milestones – all of which require forward-looking routing logic. Without target dates, it's difficult for supervisors to track whether work is being actioned in time, impacting SLA performance transparency.

Solution / How To Configure

Configurable ‘Target Date’ on Route Work Action. Target Date influences routing order:

Routing Priority
Secondary Priority
Target Date
Created Date / Custom Requested Date

Use Case

Email A has an SLA of 24 hours, Email B has SLA 48 hours. Prioritise A.

Impact

Improved SLA adherence. Greater operational visibility. Increased customer satisfaction

304 of 846

Reporting: Abandoned Work

Ability to report on abandoned messaging sessions (MIAW) and Voice Calls

Customer Need

Reporting on the number of abandoned work / abandonment rate is a key metric for many service organisations. This is applicable to real time channels such as chat (synchronously) and voice. In Omni, abandoned is defined as work item that entered a queue / backlog but never was accepted by an agent before the customer disconnected.

Solution

New Agent Work Status: Abandoned. Ability to report with Standard Report and Dashboards. Ability to surface new status in Wallboard

Use Case

Customer hangs up a voice call before reaching an agent. Customer ends MIAW session before reaching an agent. Customer ends MIAW or voice call when being transferred to another agent

Impact

Close reporting gaps and time to value for customer

305 of 846

Unified Routing for BYOT GA

Route VoiceCall using Omni-Channel with BYOT

Customer Need

Previously, Service Cloud Voice relied on Amazon Connect / BYOT for voice call routing, which had a 20-second limit for call acceptance. Skill-based routing was not available as well. Additionally, the blended agent experience was not always seamless, as it required using both Omni-Channel and Amazon Connect as routing engines, leading to potential edge case.

Solution / How To Configure

Require to enable Enhanced Omni-Channel first. Then configure Service Cloud Voice routing within Salesforce. Scope: inbound, outbound, transfer (agent and queue transfer), deskphone, voicemail (limited)

Use Case

Impact

Admin Productivity, Agent productivity, CSAT

306 of 846

Queue Position

Show customers position of queue on Enhanced Chat!

Customer Need

Parity gap between Live Agent Chat and the enhanced Messaging for In-App or Web products, where customers can see their queue position. Customer experience preference, particularly for small teams or companies where the queue size isn’t large, shows progress better than estimated wait time.

Solution / How To Configure

Omni publishes an event whenever the queue position of a work item changes, which is consumed by client teams (in this case, Messaging).

Use Case

Companies that rather show number in queue vs EWT.

Impact

Helps drive adoption of Enhanced Chat, away from Live Agent. Better end user experience in certain situations, especially with highly variable wait times or small backlogs.

307 of 846

Get Availability API

Check whether reps are online in Omni-Channel for Enhanced Chat

Customer Need

Parity gap between Live Agent Chat and the enhanced Messaging for In-App or Web products, where customers can choose to hide or show chat based on the availability of service reps in Omni-Channel. Primarily for the MIAW teams to consume, who will offer the end customer facing API to make the decision.

Solution

The API call will return key details like queue size and number of agents online for specific queues.

Impact

Ensures Messaging customers can deliver a true live chat experience to their end users, by only showing the chat button when agents are actually available. Customers can proactively manage their chat availability, which ensures their end-users have a clear, positive experience (e.g., immediate connection or appropriate offline options)

308 of 846

Flow Migration Support

Ability to migrate flows between orgs without manual updates!

Customer Need

Automate deployments of routing changes. Prevent opportunity for human error

Solution / How To Configure

Add support for Service Channel, Routing Configuration and Bots when migrating Flows. Requires admin to upgrade to Version 2.0 of the Route Work action. Still need to use Variables to lookup Queues or Users when routing to those.

Impact

Faster time time value. Faster deployments for routing changes

309 of 846

Metadata Completeness

All Omni entities now supported via the Metadata & Tooling APIs

Customer Need

Speed up deployment of Omni-Channel. Ability to copy/clone Omni-Channel settings between orgs

Solution

Support for Omni entities using the Metadata API
Support for Omni entities using the Tooling API

Impact

Faster time to value and faster deployments for routing changes

3350 IdeaExchange points

310 of 846

Real-time Monitoring of Voice AI Agents

Monitor and Interrupt AI Agent-owned Voice

Customer Need

Customers can now leverage service AI agents to handle customer calls but customers are wary of having Generative AI Bots talking to their end customers without some oversight. Customers seek greater visibility and control to ensure quality interactions and maintain trust with their end customers.

Solution / How To Configure

Extend real-time AI agent monitoring for service supervisors to support voice AI agents, allowing live monitoring of AI-owned emails with end customers. Leveraging Raise Flag for Supervisor action provides actionable indicator about which AI-owned calls need human support. Provide tools for seamless escalation to human representatives when needed.

Impact

Supervisor visibility of live AI Agent calls fostering confidence in AI-driven interactions. Human-in-the loop experience for end customers.

311 of 846

Field Service

& Scheduler

312 of 846

Scheduling & Optimization

313 of 846

Schedule Agent - Customer Outreach

Customer Need�Dispatchers and service managers frequently need to rebook appointments with customers due to unexpected disruptions, a process that is time-consuming and prevents them from focusing on more complex tasks. �

Solution / How To Configure�To streamline customer outreach, an employee can trigger the AI agent by either clicking the "Rebook with Agentforce" action on an appointment or by making a conversational request in the Agentforce panel. The system automatically validates the appointment's eligibility. If it passes, a notification flow sends a pre-configured SMS to the customer to begin the rescheduling conversation.�

Use Case�A dispatcher learns a technician is unavailable for the day. Instead of manually coordinating each appointment, the dispatcher activates agent action from the dispatcher console, to send a notification SMS to the customer to recoordinate

Impact

Dispatcher Productivity

All Editions

314 of 846

Agentforce Scheduling Supervisor View

Enable Dispatchers to monitor scheduling agent activities

Customer Need

To build trust and feel confident working with agents, dispatchers need a solution that keeps them on top of agent activities, escalations, and customer interactions in real time. This ensures smooth and effective field service operations.

Solution / How To Configure

Mobile Worker Productivity

319 of 846

Data Capture - Pre-Built Templates

Customer Need

Field Service Customers want out of the box Data Capture flows to get up and running with the feature quickly. This will help customers see best practices when building Data Capture Forms, but also allow them to adjust the pre-built forms to fit their business needs.

Solution / How To Configure

We are providing 3 out of the box Data Data Capture templates that can be configured and tweaked by customers.

Use Case

I am a Field Service customer and want to get onboarded with Data Capture. Pre-built templates will help speed up that process. Pre-built templates: Create Leads & Opportunities, Job & Asset Completion Form, & Service Appointment Status Change.

Impact

Mobile Worker Productivity

Improve Time to Value

All Editions

320 of 846

Data Capture - Debugging

Customer Need

Field Service Admins need better debugging within Data Capture flows so they can test out their forms using the same offline engine used in the Field Service mobile app.

Solution / How To Configure

We now provide a better debugging experience within our Data Capture process type to allow an easier builder experience for our form builders

Use Case

I am building a Data Capture flow. I need the ability to use debugging tools that provide variable values and any errors that may be encountered.

Impact

Error Identification & Resolution

Improve Time to Value

Improve Efficiency

Better User Experience

Reduce Deployment Risks

All Editions

321 of 846

Data Capture - Enhanced Offline Engine & Additional Setting Configurations

Customer Need

Field Service Admins would like more automation capabilities in Data Capture flows that are available in screen flows. They would also like to improve sharing settings on the Forms object by using “Controlled by Parent”.

Solution / How To Configure

We now support Global Variables, Repeaters, & Regex Formulas within our Data Capture flow types. Additionally, we added an org permission that can be enabled so the form sharing settings are controlled by parent (SA, WO, & WOLI).

Use Case

I am building a Data Capture flow and would like the ability to configure it to have Global Variables, Repeaters, and Regex Formulas.

Impact

Mobile Worker Productivity

Data Input Accuracy

Business Process Automation

All Editions

322 of 846

Data Capture - Launch Form from Quick Actions & Deep Link Support

Customer Need

Field Service Customers wanted the ability to deep link back and forth between Field Maps (or any app) and our Field Service App when filling out forms. Customers also wanted the ability to launch a form through a Quick Action from the SA, WO, and WOLI.

Solution / How To Configure

Customers can now deep link in and out of our Field Service App while passing information that can be saved to a Data Capture Form. Customers can also launch Forms from Quick Actions on the SA, WO, or WOLI.

Use Case

I am a Field Service customer that gathers vegetation management data in Field Maps, and that information should also be stored into a data capture form. I am able to pass information from Field Maps into Data Capture forms to save in Salesforce.

Impact

Mobile Worker Productivity

Improve Time to Value

All Editions

323 of 846

Data Capture - Upload Image LWC Enhancements

Customer Need

Field Service customers want the ability to prevent a mobile worker from going into their camera gallery when uploading images in a flow. They also want to ability to save the Date & Time in which the image was capture.

Solution / How To Configure

We now allow form builders to save the Date/Time of the image to content documents records. We also allow admins to configure Camera Only mode, which prevents mobile workers from going into their gallery in both iOS and Android.

Use Case

As an operations manager, I want to report on the date and time in which images were actually captured out in the field. I also want my mobile workers going right into camera mode and not into their gallery when uploading images to a form.

Impact

Mobile Worker Productivity

Data Input Accuracy

Business Process Automation

All Editions

324 of 846

AI-Powered Voice to Record Edit

Customer Need

Field technicians need fast, safe ways to capture service data while on the job. Manual data entry on mobile devices can be time-consuming and difficult in "hands-busy" scenarios where technicians are working with tools or equipment. This can lead to workflow interruptions, data entry errors, and significant safety risks in potentially hazardous environments.

Solution / How To Configure

This feature introduces a voice-enabled form filling capability directly within the Field Service Mobile App, empowering technicians to complete service reports, inspection checklists, and work orders entirely through voice commands.

Use Case

A technician performing a multi-point safety inspection can complete their required digital checklist without putting down their tools. While examining a piece of equipment, they can use voice commands such as, "Go to pressure reading," followed by, "Set value to 150 PSI," and then, "Confirm safety valve check."

Impact

Resource productivity, Technician Satisfaction

All Editions

CRM Analytics

329 of 846

Semi Join & Anti Join UX

Enable intuitive, code-free data filtering in the Explorer UI

Customer Need

Analysts and admins often need to filter data based on whether related records exist (or don’t). Until now, this was only possible via SAQL or SQL code. There was no way to do this via clicks in the UI, creating a barrier for non-technical users.

Solution / How To Configure

You can now add semi-joins and anti-joins through the Join Data Source flow in the lens builder. Simply pick your datasets, select the join type (semi or anti), and map up to 5 fields between them. The join is displayed visually and can be edited or removed easily from the panel.

Use Case

A CRMA admin or business user wants to:

Find accounts with no opportunities (anti-join);
Show only accounts with opportunities above 10K (semi-join);
Filter dashboards based on related data existence, without writing SAQL.

Impact

This feature removes the need for SAQL or bindings in common filtering scenarios, making it easier for non-technical users to work with data. It improves performance by retrieving only relevant rows and aligns with our “Clicks, not Code” vision to drive broader adoption.

Beta

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

330 of 846

Search by API Name

Faster field discovery for advanced users

Customer Need

In complex datasets, many technical users know field API names (e.g., opp_stage) but struggle to locate them through labels like “Stage” in search. CRM Analytics now supports searching by API names across field pickers—making it faster and easier to find the exact field, especially in datasets with overlapping or confusing labels.

Solution / How To Configure

Search for fields, measures, or dimensions using their API names wherever field selection is supported. Where this works:

Fields panel in Lens
Connect Data Sources modal
Field Picker
Filters section inside Lens Explore

Just type the API name (e.g., CloseDate) into the search bar, results will now include matches by both label and API name.

Use Case

A dashboard builder knows the API name but not the exact label for a field—they can now directly search and select it during lens or widget creation without toggling views or hunting through metadata.

Impact

Saves time for technical or advanced users.

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

331 of 846

VPC Support

Securly Push Data to Snowflake via Recipes and Sync Out

Customer Need

Currently customers can not use Private Connection to write data to Snowflake from CRMA.

Solution / How To Configure

This will allow customer to connect to Snowflake SyncOut and Recipe Output over Private link.

Use Case

For customers in regulated industries, they prefer xfering data to CRMA over a private connection.

Impact

Compliance and security

Requires Salesforce Private Connect

332 of 846

Faster Snapshots with Optimized Append

Faster refresh of your snapshot data

Customer Need

While adding snapshot to an existing dataset, the entire dataset should not be registered which takes a lot longer.

Solution / How To Configure

In the recipe output node, select “Existing Dataset” option under the “Write To” property and select “Append”.

Use Case

Reduce refresh times for large snapshot datasets by optimizing for incremental data changes.

Impact

Faster data refresh times for appended datasets

Improvement in running snapshots

60^%

333 of 846

Faster Data Refresh with Upsert & Deletes

Faster refresh of your Salesforce data

Customer Need

While updating and adding changes to an existing dataset, the entire dataset should not be registered which takes a lot longer.

Solution / How To Configure

In the recipe output node, select “Existing Dataset” option under the “Write To” property and select “Upsert” or “Delete”

Use Case

Reduce refresh times for large datasets by optimizing for incremental data changes.

Impact

Faster data refresh times for datasets

334 of 846

DataBricks Connection Improvements

OAuth Support

Customer Need

Customers want additional security, to be able to specify, at finer granularities, which objects can be accessed and the specific access privileges granted for these objects.

Solution / How To Configure

With OAuth, instead of providing a token, customers will provide a client ID and a client secret to authenticate.

Use Case

Additional security options for connecting to

DataBricks.

Impact

Compliance and security

335 of 846

Experience Cloud

336 of 846

DAM Connect

Reference Media Assets from External Content Providers

Customer Need

Customers currently using Digital Asset Management (DAM) tools to manage their assets, when writing content within Salesforce, they have to either manually download the file from the DAM and then upload it to Salesforce CMS or Copy/Paste the link to the external URL.

Solution / How To Configure

ISVs will provide a package that customers can install in their orgs. Admins can configure their DAM Instances using the Package Guidelines.Once the instance is configured, content authors can directly select and save reference of media assets directly from ISV UI.

Use Case

Content Author wants to use media assets that are saved in External Content Tools such as DAM tools like Bynder, Cloudinary, Typeface etc.. Content Authors will like to just select and reference the media assets such as image from external tools in their flow of work like writing an email, building a landing page or creating a news article.

Impact

Content Author Productivity will be greatly boosted as they will less clicks and better user experience to select media assets from their external Content Providers such as DAM tools like Bynder, Cloudinary.

Only available in Enterprise and Unlimited Editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced

337 of 846

Data Cloud One Support

Send Behavioral Data from LWR Sites to Data Cloud

Customer Need

Customers using Data Cloud One can capture detailed information about your site interactions and send it to Data Cloud for ingestion.

Solution / How To Configure

Configure your Data Cloud / Data Cloud One instances in Data Cloud and then configure your Enhanced LWR Site: https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_data_cloud.htm

338 of 846

Commerce Cloud

339 of 846

Commerce Marketing

340 of 846

Shopper Marketing Consent

Your Privacy, Your Control: Marketing with Consent

Customer Need

SFCC lacks a native, OOB solution for shopper marketing consent. This forces customers to build custom solutions for a foundational capability, leading to increased implementation costs and project timelines

Solution / How To Configure

Shopper Consent capture & Management built in OOB for PWA, Headless Selling Channels and More. Natively Integrated with Salesforce Marketing with extensibility to integrate with 3rd Party Marketing Platforms.

Use Case

Store Admin can create and manage consents declaratively in Business Manager
Shopper can provide marketing consent and email on storefront and manage on My Account Page
Shopper consents are readily available in Salesforce Marketing for sending notifications in compliant way

Impact

Building trust with a compliant, personalized experience.

B2C Premium Edition Only

Beta

341 of 846

Abandoned Cart Notification

Re-engaging customers, recovering sales

Customer Need

Abandoned cart notifications can recover up to 54% of lost sales, Salesforce Commerce Cloud lacks this OOB feature, forcing businesses to use costly third-party or custom solutions to close this critical product gap.

Solution / How To Configure

OOB abandoned cart email capabilities with customizable templates and extensibility in Business Manager. This also includes an Abandoned Cart Trigger Event for Salesforce Marketing Cloud to automate targeted campaigns and recover lost sales.

Use Case

Send hyper personalized abandoned cart Email with offers and product recommendations when shopper abandoned cart
Customer can customize email templates using content editor
Abandoned cart trigger is now available in Salesforce Marketing Cloud, enabling targeted campaigns via email, WhatsApp, and SMS

Impact

Recover lost opportunities and build shopper loyalty

B2C Premium Edition Only

Beta

342 of 846

Unified Commerce Marketing Campaigns

Consistent, Connected Shopper Experience

Customer Need

Effective commerce marketing requires a unified strategy. Unfortunately, many of our customers are running campaigns in silos across different e-commerce channels. This manual, disconnected approach—often managed with spreadsheets—leads to inconsistent shopper experiences and frustration.

Solution / How To Configure

Our native integration with Salesforce Marketing will allow commerce customers to seamlessly connect their marketing campaigns with commerce campaigns directly within Business Manager.

Use Case

Marketer can connect Marketing Campaign with Commerce Campaign as Experience in Business Manager
Marketer can leverage same content, offers from Commerce Campaign in Marketing emails to deliver consistent experience.

Impact

Hyper Personalized Shipper Experience, Revenue Growth

B2C Premium Edition Only

Beta

343 of 846

Post Order Marketing Campaign

Consistent, Connected Shopper Experience

Customer Need

Post Order Marketing Campaigns are very effective marketing strategy to retain shoppers, build loyalty and generate recurring sales. Commerce is missing these important capabilities. Our customer spending substantial investment to built such campaigns leveraging 3rd party solution.

Solution / How To Configure

Our native integration with Salesforce Marketing will allow commerce customers to have OOB Post Order Marketing Campaigns. Customer would be required to just set the target shopper rules, adjust email template and enable it.

Use Case

Commerce Marketer can send Email, SMS, WhatsApp after a defined period of time when shopper place order on website.
Commerce Marketer can add product recommendations, offers, promo codes for next order based on previous purchase

Impact

Generate recurring revenue and building Shopper Loyalty

B2C Premium Edition + Marketing Cloud

Beta

344 of 846

Data Cloud for Commerce

345 of 846

B2C Commerce Intelligence Connector

Use Commerce Intelligence Connector to ingest robust B2C data into Data Cloud

OCI App User Permission

New user permissions allow granular access for users

Customer Need

Merchants need the ability to grant “view only” access to support staff and merchandisers to help support shopper interactions/experience. Currently all OCI users have access to all OCI functionality.

Solution / How To Configure

5 new permission sets have been added so that specific access can be given to users.

Omnichannel Inventory Manager - all access
Omnichannel Inventory Merchandiser - limited access
Omnichannel Inventory Retail Manager - read only access

Use Case

Support staff can view inventory availability and answer customer questions without the ability to edit inventory values.

Impact

Resolves risk taken by some current customers who have knowingly granted support staff unneeded access in order to open up the service use case in the past.

Full OM/OMLite

351 of 846

Tax/Product Only Adjustments

Apply tax and pricing changes to an order post-Order Summary creation

Customer Need

A merchant needs the ability to add or remove tax from a product line after an order has been placed. Currently they can only adjust the price of the item and that adjustment also affects the tax.

Solution / How To Configure

A new Adjustment Type of TaxOnly has been added to the Adjustment API allowing a +/- adjustment to tax.
Product price can also have a +/- adjustment

Use Case

SI’s or Admin (using the API) can create a custom solution that will allow the removal of tax on items that are supposed to be tax exempt.

Customers can adjust taxes on an order summary when tax goes from estimated to final during fulfillment

Impact

Merchants are able to make adjustment to the tax on an item. This has been a request from SI’s for many releases.

Full OM

352 of 846

Unreferenced Refunds/Payment Credits

Ability to refund money to a payment instrument not present in original txn

Customer Need

Customers want flexibility for returning money to an end user - sometimes to a payment instrument not used in the original transaction. Currently our customers need to implement expensive customizations in order to achieve this use case

Solution / How To Configure

Return flow api’s and LWC’s have been modified to provide the service agent the choice to return money to the original payment instrument or select “payment credit”. The payment credit can then be used to fund a store credit or gift card (this last step would be custom integration with what merchants credit/gift card provider)

Use Case

Merchant has a policy that returns to credit card must be made within 30 days of original purchase, but will provide store credit after 30 days
Merchant has a policy that final sale items will only receive store credit if returned�

Impact

Contribute to operational excellence by providing flexibility in the returns processes, and enhancing customer service experience

Full OM/OM Lite

353 of 846

Delivery Estimation

Provide reliable and accurate delivery estimations on your storefront

Customer Need

Subscriptions - ARC APIs Support

API support to perform amendments/renewals for active subscriptions

Customer Need

Subscription users lack flexibility to manage subscriptions: amend quantities, renew early, or cancel on preferred dates. These actions require support intervention, leading to operational inefficiencies, delayed responses, and poor user experience. For merchants admins, especially in Manufacturing, Tech, and Telecom, this limits self-service capabilities and impacts adoption.

Solution / How To Configure

APIs enable developers to support:

Amendments from the next billing date
Renewals from the term end date with pricing visibility

Use Case

Merchant admin/ B2B Shopper can (via. APIs)

Update subscription quantity ahead of billing using the Amend API.
Renew a subscription early to lock in pricing.

Impact

Drives adoption of self-service subscription features
Reduces support dependency and Improves experience
Accelerates time-to-value and unlocks new B2B use cases

359 of 846

Shareable URLs

Persist sticky parameters in URL to enable storefront personalisation based on URL

Customer Need

Enable merchants to create shareable, persistent URLs that customize storefronts based on buyer groups, allowing for microsites and differentiated shopping experiences that can be bookmarked, copied, and shared.

Solution / How To Configure

Configure Sticky Parameters - Register which URL parameters should be "sticky" in experience builder for a storefront on the builder.

Configure Buyer Groups - Use buyer group extensibility to set up buyer groups with different products, pricing, and promotions for each parameter value.

Use Case

Unblock site customisation use-cases for customers like Coca-Cola, MaryKay that want to power microsites for different pincodes , IBCs etc.

Impact

Reduce merchant implementation costs

Transforms static storefronts into dynamic, persistent experiences where the URL itself drives the entire shopping experience, unlocking microsites and differentiated storefronts

360 of 846

Currency Switching for B2B

Enable currency switching in cart for B2B authenticated users

Customer Need

Concurrent site access for B2B shoppers: Users mapped to the same business account should be able to place orders in different currencies.

Solution / How To Configure

Pass currency in cart creation api for advanced customisation use-cases requiring currency switching.
B2B users can now switch currency they are browsing / shopping in without overriding the currency mapped the business account.

Use Case

Unblock customisation use-cases for storefronts supporting multi-currency.

Impact

Unblock site customisation use-cases for customers (including reMarkable, Siemens) that want to unlock concurrent access to their storefronts for different business account users in different currencies.

361 of 846

Markets for B2B

Enable locale switching & markets’ personalization for B2B authenticated users

Customer Need

Enable B2B users to place orders for different markets that may be tied to different ship-to-countries, product entitlements, pricing or promotions.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable markets for authenticated B2B users from the markets’ setup page in the commerce app to allow shoppers to seamlessly switch locales and corresponding product entitlements, promotions, pricing.

Use Case

Users mapped to the same buyer account may be placing orders for shipping-locations in different geographies - where each geography should be only entitled to a specific set of product entitlements, promotions or ship-to-countries.

Impact

Reduce merchant implementation costs.

362 of 846

Internationalisation for Messaging

Allow emails to be tailored to shopper locale

Customer Need

Allow emails powered by UMA on B2B commerce (“Welcome Email”, “Abandoned Cart notification” & the “Order Confirmation Email”) to be tailored to the shopper’s locale and triggered in any Salesforce supported language.

Solution / How To Configure

Store admins can create language- specific content in CMS.
Admins can extend the email flow to dynamically select content.

Use Case

As a shopper, I can now receive all emails in my browsing language ensuring readability and a seamless user experience
As a merchant, I can now tailor messages (language and content) sent to different shoppers based on the locale they’re browsing from.

Impact

Ability to tailor shopper communication in all Salesforce supported languages
Critical for customers in EMEA (~40%) that tailor stores to multiple languages via locales

363 of 846

Data Cloud One

Enable remote DC & data-space awareness for commerce stores

Customer Need

Provide merchants with the ability to control data-sharing across different orgs through data-spaces and support for remote data cloud.

Solution / How To Configure

Set up Data Cloud for Commerce from the Commerce Setup Assistant, each commerce store can now be mapped to a different data space.
Commerce can also now be deployed in companion mode, and connected to Data Cloud provisioned on a remote org.

Use Case

Remote DC Support : Commerce provisioned on remote or “companion orgs”, can be connected to a DC instance set up on a separate “home org”.
Data Space Awareness: all DC related features including DC based analytics, DC based segmentation & UMA to be data-space aware.

Impact

Enables real-time personalization, segmented access of data, unified commerce analytics across all brands and channels and much more.

364 of 846

Beta

Product Configurator for Commerce

Enable self-service sales for complex configurable products

Customer Need

B2B merchants currently lack native capabilities to set up and sell configurable products, and B2B buyers can’t self-service configure and place orders for configurable products on B2B storefronts.

Solution / How To Configure

Support configurable products by adopting Revenue Cloud dynamic bundles and attributes on commerce.
Enable Revenue cloud advanced product configurator on B2B storefronts for buyers.

Use Case

B2B Sellers: Create configurable bundles on Revenue Cloud and publish for self-service sales on commerce B2B storefront.
B2B Buyers: Self-service configure product bundles on a storefront using the product configurator and place orders.

Impact

Lower merchant implementation costs
Improve sales cycle times via self-service capability.

365 of 846

Open Source Components

Empowering developers with direct access to component code for faster, customized storefront experiences

Customer Need

A standard Commerce template that delivers a modern, consumer-grade storefront with the B2B features customers need.

Solution / How To Configure

Developers clone the public Git repo for core components.
Customize styling, or functionality directly in code.
Deploy tailored components without disrupting unrelated parts of the storefront.

Use Case

Make custom changes to storefront components without having to start from scratch.

Impact

Faster time-to-value & greater site stability with version control.�

366 of 846

Unified Commerce Template

Deliver a modern, high quality B2B storefront with enhanced features and scalability.

Customer Need

B2B customers want a single storefront template that combines a modern, intuitive design with robust enterprise-grade B2B capabilities.

Solution / How To Configure

Create a new storefront and select “Commerce Template.”
Customize the store and launch with a modern UI that supports all B2B capabilities.

Use Case

A B2B seller creates a new storefront using the Commerce Template, applies their brand styling, configures capabilities, and launches faster with a consistent, contemporary shopper experience.

Impact

Faster time-to-market & enhanced UI/UX consistency�

367 of 846

B2C Commerce Solution

368 of 846

Guided Shopping for B2C

Increase Conversion with Conversational Commerce and Agentforce

Customer Need

Shoppers want intelligent, proactive assistance that helps them find, evaluate, and buy products effortlessly—without needing to navigate complex menus or pages. Merchants need scalable tools to boost conversion and reduce support overhead

Solution / How To Configure

An Agentforce template for B2C Guided Shopping with topics and actions for Product Search, Product/Site FAQs, Cart Management, Checkout, Order Confirmation, and rich UI components. Setting up Guided Shopping for B2C Storefronts involves several configuration in Business Manager, Salesforce Permissions, Agentforce, Data Cloud, and Messaging for Web. To see the B2C Guided Shopper template, enable the ‘AgentforceForGuidedShoppingB2C’ org preference and follow the detailed setup guide

Use Case

The Commerce Shopper Agent autonomously supports the full shopper journey by:

Proactively guiding product discovery using natural language and context-aware category suggestions
Intelligently answering store, product, and policy questions via Data Cloud-powered FAQs
Managing the basket add, edit, remove products — and enabling seamless express checkout (e.g., Apple Pay)
Using rich visual components to create intuitive, engaging, chat-based shopping

Impact

Transforms the commerce experience from reactive to intelligent and autonomous — accelerating product discovery, reducing friction, and increasing conversion through an always-on, agentic assistant.

Agentforce

369 of 846

Contextual Search

Enhance product discovery and improve search relevance with intuitive understanding of shopper queries

Customer Need

Shoppers need to find products that match their needs using natural language, moving beyond exact keyword matches to understand intent and context. Today merchants have to setup multiple synonyms to fine tune search.

Solution / How To Configure

For Pilot, PM will enable this new feature for select customer using Feature Toggle. Once PM has enabled the FT, then merchant needs to enable this feature under ‘Search Preferences’. It is recommended that ‘Product Description’ is added as searchable attributes, and then rebuild index.

Use Case

Shoppers search for "comfortable sneakers" will discover products that are described as "ergonomic running shoes" or "cushioned trainers".

Impact

Enhanced search relevance, improved product discovery, and higher conversion rates and customer satisfaction due to a more intuitive and effective shopping experience.

Pilot

370 of 846

Page Designer: Page List Improvements

Improved search, sort, filter for easier page management

Customer Need

Merchants struggle with and spend too much time finding the pages they need to manage due to the current grid and functions provided on the Page Designer List page.

Solution / How To Configure

Provide an updated grid page that provides functions to easily organize, search, sort. Including infinite scroll, custom grid display to easily read the names of pages, sort by folder assignments, search by Name and ID.

Use Case

Merchandisers can easily search for and find the page to edit in page designer by using the new management functions.

Impact

Improve merchant productivity

Infinite Scroll

Sort by Folder

Column Reorder/Resize

371 of 846

Dynamic Page: Optional Selection

Select top-level category, sub-categories are optional

Customer Need

Merchants need more flexibility in assigning categories to dynamic pages to control when landing pages are presented. Currently, when assigning dynamic pages to a category in the user interface, selecting the top level category also selects all the sub-categories.

Solution / How To Configure

Merchants can now select any combination of category assignments when creating or editing a dynamic page through the user interface.

Use Case

Merchandisers want to display a Page Designer category landing page for my top level category but only display product listings for the sub-categories. When creating or editing a dynamic page, they assign the top level category to a dynamic page but do not assign any of the sub-categories. This assignment type is now supported through the user interface as opposed to only being supported through custom code and import.

Impact

Improve merchant productivity
Lower total cost of ownership by reducing custom solutions

1st: click to select top level & sub-categories

2nd: click again to select only top-level category

3rd: option to select sub-categories

372 of 846

Content Life Cycle Improvements

Easy to see content references & quota tracking

Customer Need

Merchants need to be able to have a better view into their content asset quota (especially with page designer usage), and see how content assets is being referenced in their storefronts to make it easier to delete

Solution / How To Configure

Content Asset Quota reflects a sub-line item for page designer usage

Content Assets tab has a sub-tab to show content slot references

Use Case

As an admin, I can easily see how my content quota is being consumed across assets and page designer.
As a merchandiser, I can easily see slot references within a content asset, so I can delete it.

Impact

Improve merchant productivity
Lower total cost of ownership by reducing custom solutions

373 of 846

Shop the Store

Unlock store inventory in product search & product browse

Customer Need

Merchants need to make store inventory discoverable for shoppers in the first phases of their customer journey. Shop the Store unlocks store inventory in search and category browse & let shoppers refine & filter by products which are available in their preferred stores.

Solution / How To Configure

Instance admins unlock Shop the Store for search & browse with a feature switch for all development models (SiteGen, SFRA, PWA and Composable) and max 10 sites/storefronts. Merchandiser can enable the feature via search preferences and index native store inventory lists or inventory in Omnichannel Inventory (OCI) in new inventory index based on defines stores in Business Manager.

Use Case

Expose store inventory in online search & browse to allow shoppers to discover products based on their nearby or preferred stores.

Impact

Increase shopper CSAT. Increases merchandiser productivity. Reduces TCO by avoiding custom solutions. The native solution addresses one of the top customer raised feature requests!

374 of 846

Business Manager UI Updates

Easily discover, create & manage Campaigns and A/B Tests

Customer Need

Business Manager users need to be able to easily discover desired business and admin functionality. Merchandiser need to efficiently create & manage campaign details and A/B tests.

Solution / How To Configure

BM now supports easy to access options for users to search across all apps and modules they have permissions for. Furthermore, users can leverage new user interfaces for Campaigns detail page and A/B Tests module. The new experiences are available by default. Instance admins can revert the updates to the previous UI via Feature Switch in cases of undesired behaviour. Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) files are now supported as thumbnails in Business Manager as well.

Use Case

Business Manager users can search and uncover all functionality they have permission to with the updated AppSwitcher. Merchandiser can create and manage campaign details and A/B tests in new UIs

Impact

Increases merchandiser productivity. Reduces number of required clicks and improves time to perform tasks.

375 of 846

Coupon Code Sharing

Easily create and unlock coupons across multiple storefronts

Customer Need

Merchandiser need streamline marketing efforts and easily create and share coupon codes across multiple sites and storefronts.

Solution / How To Configure

Instance admins can unlock Coupon Code sharing at Administration > Feature Switches > Coupon Code Sharing. Merchandiser leverage a new Business Manager module at Merchant Tools > Online Marketing > Coupon Code Sharing to share or unshare coupon codes across sites of an instance.

Use Case

Coupon Code sharing allows Business Manager users to share system-generated coupons across multiple sites. It also allows to share the usage and redemption of these codes in all of the selected sites. Across the selected sites all coupon code settings, like status (enabled) and redemption, will be shared as well.

Impact

Increases merchandiser productivity. Reduces TCO by avoiding custom solutions. Avoids revenue impact (fraudulent redemptions).

376 of 846

Sort by Unit Price

Allow shoppers to sort by unit price and find the best deals

Customer Need

Merchants, especially in grocery business, need to let shoppers sort by unit price to allow them to easily compare products of different sizes or quantities.

Solution / How To Configure

Merchandiser can create sorting rules with a unit price standard sorting attribute. In Business Manager, click App Launcher, and then select Merchant Tools > Site > Search > Sorting Rules. Add a sorting rule to sort by Unit Price. From Site > Storefront Sorting Options, add a sorting option with the new sorting rule. Rebuild the search indexes and get the latest changes in your site.

Use Case

Shoppers can now easily sort prices by a standard quantity, and pay the lowest possible price for a product. This gives shoppers more control and let them quickly identify the most affordable products, especially when comparing products of different sizes or quantities.

Impact

Increases shopper CSAT. Reduces TCO for merchants by avoiding custom solutions. Allows to configure unit price sort with a few clicks.

377 of 846

Search Features Support for PWA/Headless

Bringing parity on search features across storefronts

Customer Need

Using our native search capabilities, developers need to easily build rich product discovery experiences for PWA Kit and Headless storefronts—featuring visual suggestions and variant-level statuses like ‘Trending’—to accelerate shopper conversions.

Solution / How To Configure

Shopper Search API to support custom attribute

Product Search: Use the includedCustomVariationProperties parameter to return up to 5 custom variant properties with search results.
Get Search Suggestions: Use the expand and includedCustomProductProperties parameters to return up to 5 custom properties with suggestions.

Use Case

Shoppers can now find the best products faster by using rich search suggestions to instantly identify variant-specific statuses like "On Sale" or "Best Seller."

Impact

Improved conversion and user experience by highlighting key aspects of a product and its variations

378 of 846

Dynamic Categorization Improvements

Improved user experience and reliability

Customer Need

Merchants were encountering various bugs and the need for workarounds due to known issues.

Solution

Created robust rule handling for special characters
Improved UI clarity for all screen sizes
Enhanced support for complex and lengthy data
Standardized international date and time formats
Streamlined category selection process
Fixed “is defined/is not defined” operator function

Use Case

Easier, more straightforward creation of Dynamic Categorization rules.

Impact

Improve merchant productivity and ease of use

379 of 846

Secure and Flexible Shopper Login Experience

Expanding Identity Provider Support

Customer Need

Merchants on our platform use many different IDP’s to validate their shopper’s identities. Customers are looking to easily adopt our platform and seamlessly integrate with industry leading solutions.

Solution

Added support for LINE IDP in SLAS which is increasing in popularity for social logins especially in the Japan region.
Expanded our Hybrid Auth capabilities with support for public clients and 3rd party identity providers that support the OpenID protocol.
SLAS authenticates with 3rd party IDP using a JSON Web Token (JWT) signed with its private key.

Use Case

Standards based SSO/Federation with SLAS using OpenID/OAuth protocol
Stronger Protection for OAuth 2.0 / OIDC Flows using JWT signed with private keys

Impact

Merchants can use secure IDP client authentication flows now along with using their preferred identity providers while maintaining secure customer shopping experiences on composable or hybrid storefronts.

380 of 846

Native Hybrid Authentication

The fastest path to Composable Storefront gets even easier

Customer Need

Incremental implementation of Composable Storefront requires a hybrid approach which can be complex and previously involved the plugin SLAS module which was prone to complications.

Solution

B2C Commerce now supports native hybrid authentication with a simple configuration. Shoppers can navigate between Composable Storefront and SFRA or SiteGenesis pages without disruption or loss of data, inclusive of basket transfer, shopper context session attributes and support for consistent analytics.

Use Case

Customers looking to use use both SFRA/SiteGenesis authentication and headless authentication at the same time – either on their own to take advantage of SLAS features, or to incrementally adopt the Composable Storefront.

Impact

Lowers development implementation time and increases performance.

381 of 846

PWA Kit Standard and Bonus Products

All product types now supported out of the box

Customer Need

Implementation of standard products and bonus products required customer implementation code increasing implementation time for some product types that are often required.

Solution

The PWA Kit now comes out-of-the-box with support for Standard Products and Bonus Products

Use Case

Standard Products - Sell products that have no variants, such as color or size – also available within product sets and product bundles.

Bonus Products - automatic bonus products as part of the shopping experience. When a customer adds a qualifying product to the cart, a free bonus product is also added to the cart. Bonus products are displayed in various pages-the cart, order summary in checkout, order confirmation, and order details.

Impact

Lowers development implementation time.

382 of 846

PWA Kit Store Features

Bring your physical stores into the online shopping experience

Customer Need

Customers with physical stores often need to have these stores represented online with a store locator, the ability to search for items in stores, and the ability to buy online and pickup in the store.

Solution

PWA Kit now has four specific features that have been added to help with stores: a Store Locator, Shop the Store search for shoppers to see inventory in the stores, Buy Online Pickup in Store options for fulfillment with Multiple Shipment support.

Use Case

Customers with physical stores have out of the box support for shoppers to find the stores, search inventory in the stores, and elect to fulfill items from the store.

Impact

Increase availability of items by taking store inventory into account. Increase conversion with store fulfillment as an option.

383 of 846

SCAPI New Features

Better API visibility, control, and performance

Customer Need

Customers need better visibility into API errors and performance for faster troubleshooting, along with more control over API settings, to ensure smoother operations and integrations.

Solution

Custom API reporting and configuration: Improved error insights for custom APIs
SCAPI Timeout Settings: Set preferences for timeout values - no more need to involve Salesforce support
Client IP Forwarding: Easily forward client IPs for geolocation and other services.
OAS 3: Modernized API definitions, SDKs and documentation, and you can download the OAS specification.
Server Timing: Evaluate your performance with precise timing values for each step in the API call chain.

Use Case

Developers using SCAPI looking for enhanced visibility and troubleshooting for their implementations.

Impact

Better visibility into system performance and errors, greater control over timeouts, and a more efficient developer experience.

384 of 846

B2C Commerce Intelligence JDBC Driver

Use your own BI tools to connect to B2C Commerce using JDBC driver

Customer Need

Commerce Intelligence Platform has a wealth of business and technical health metrics for B2C customers. However it is fixed in structure and not easily downloadable nor can be customized by users making it difficult to analyze various scenarios that can impact revenue.

Solution / How To Configure

Provide JDBC access for customers to retrieve order (sales, products and promotions), search and shopper journey data into their own Analytics, BI and other reporting tools using JDBC driver.

Use Case

Merchandisers and analysts can now easily extract data onto third party business intelligence platforms without doing manual downloads with spreadsheets etc.

Impact

Improve merchant productivity

385 of 846

eCDN New Features

Improved Security, Availability and Performance

Customer Need

Customers need a available platform that has 24/7 security and performance, along with more control over BM and API settings, for smoother operations and integrations.

Solution

The Salesforce Commerce Cloud Embedded Content Delivery Network (eCDN) enhances the platform's security, performance, and reliability. Key features include:

Security: PCI compliance, DDoS protections, SSL/TLS encryption, firewall/WAF, and rate limiting.
Performance: Origin shielding, CDN and application layer caching, Dynamic Imaging Service (DIS), unique URL-based cache, and web tier content cache in JWA.
Management: Cache controls, page assembly definitions, and customer self-service management of eCDN settings via the Business Manager (BM) UI.
Analytics: Logs streamed to the customer’s S3 store via Logpush and metrics available via LogCenter.
Additionally, 30% of customers use an additional stacked CDN provider on top of eCDN for enhanced content delivery capabilities.

Use Case

Security/Admin using looking to onboard to eCOM for SFRA/SiteGenesis/Composable or Headless. Leverage BM UI and CDN-API to enhance visibility and troubleshooting for their implementations.

Impact

Better visibility into system performance and errors, greater control over timeouts, and a more efficient developer experience.

eCDN Traffic Flow

Embedded CDN

Embargo Countries

APAC

DDOS Mitigation

WAF

Firewall, rate limits

SSL

HTTP3, Early Hints & Polish

Static content caching

PCI Policies, Custom Firewall rules

386 of 846

Migrate to Proxy zones

Security and Compliance needs from BM UI

Customer Need

Salesforce B2C Commerce now supports migrating Legacy zones and deprecated eCDN proxy V1 zones to current V2 zone configurations in Business Manager. This update provides better security and performance, especially for ghost routing and traffic splitting scenarios.

Solution / How To Configure

In Business Manager select the Apps Switcher |Site|Embedded CDN Settings| to Migrate to Legacy and V1 Proxy Zones

NOTE: Deadline to migrate from Proxy Zone V1→V2: February 1, 2026.

Use Case

Avoid potential security vulnerabilities and performance issues, you must migrate to the V2 configuration. This ensures that you properly manage your custom hostnames and efficiently route traffic, enhancing the overall reliability of your setup

Impact

Security Admin visibility and productivity improved significantly with ease of use. Merchants can meet their security needs within BM UI.

Initiate the Legacy zone migration and/or V1 Proxy zone migration process and follow the prompts to standardize and secure you site.

387 of 846

PCI 4.0 tools via eCDN BM UI

Security and Compliance needs from BM UI

Customer Need

Enable wider access via BM UI support for PCI 4.0 tools.

Solution / How To Configure

Business Manager Embedded CDN Settings to create PCI 4.0 policies. Provides visibility to list of scripts that should be included in a log or allow policy.

Use Case

Administrators can add/review PCI policies, and view the list of scripts detected on their pages to be allowed on their payments pages with in BM UI.

Impact

Security Admin visibility and productivity improved significantly with ease of use. Merchants can meet their PCI 4.0 Compliance needs within BM UI.

388 of 846

Custom Rules and Analytics eCDN BM UI

Security, Visibility and Usability from BM UI

Customer Need

Configure custom firewall rules via BM UI with additional visibility into HTTP and Security analytics.

Solution / How To Configure

Business Manager Embedded CDN Settings adds Custom rules configurability with metrics to show rules in effect.

Use Case

Administrators can add/review/update custom firewall rules that action on specified traffic signatures from within BM UI. . Expression Builder provides visual dropdown interface, eliminates the need to understand complex expression syntax.

Traffic Analytics add a great deal of visibility before configuring Custom rules targeting traffic with specific signature

Impact

Security Admin visibility and productivity improved significantly with ease of use. Merchants can meet their security rules needs with updated user experience in BM UI.

389 of 846

Host header override rules in eCDN BM UI

Security, Visibility and Usability from BM UI

Customer Need

BM UI support for configuring Hostname header override rules to support single hostname across multiple realms.

Solution / How To Configure

Create a custom hostname in the new proxy zone in Business Manager Embedded CDN Settings. The hostname must NOT be the same that exists in the other realms/zones. Hostname should always be unique let us assume eu.example.com. This hostname is just a placeholder to do TLS termination for incoming traffic to eCDN
CDN stacking is required, Create the Path/Locale based routing rules for each realm/zone in customers stacked CDN configuration.
The host header override for all traffic with the specified path must resolve to the custom hostname created in step-1 (for eg: eu.example.com.)

Use Case

Support a single hostname across multiple realms.

Impact

Same Branded site can be maintained globally.

390 of 846

On Demand Sandbox - XXL Instance

Scale Development & Testing environment

Customer Need

Greater processing power and storage in development environments to support large-scale B2C Commerce projects, complex integrations, and intensive testing.

Solution / How To Configure

Introduction of Extra Extra Large (XXL) on-demand sandbox instances for B2C Commerce.
To use: SFCC administrator to set up an XXL sandbox in control center or through swagger API.�

Use Case

Teams developing and testing high-traffic stores, complex integrations, or running multiple concurrent projects that exceed the limitations of current sandbox sizes (M, L, XL).
Scenarios requiring advanced performance simulations for production-scale environments.

Impact

Significantly increases development and testing capacity.
Enables more efficient, faster delivery of projects with complex requirements.
Supports scalability for demanding commerce and integration scenarios.�

391 of 846

Log Center- Metrics Dashboard

Monitoring MRT & SCAPI Metrics

Customer Need

Monitor B2C Commerce storefront performance, security, and resource utilization in real time.
Proactively detect issues and streamline troubleshooting.
Increase developer and DevOps productivity by reducing manual monitoring effort.

Solution / How To Configure

The Metrics Dashboard provides actionable insights on Managed Runtime and B2C Commerce API (SCAPI) metrics.
To access: Go to the App Launcher, select Log Center, then click on Metrics.

Use Case

Website administrators monitor managed runtime and API metrics to ensure storefront reliability and performance.
DevOps teams identify slow API calls, bad cache hit rates, and security signals in near real time.
Automatically detect and resolve issues such as increasing API response times or resource exhaustion.

Impact

Faster issue detection and decreased mean-time-to-resolution.
Improved user experience via proactive performance optimization.
Streamlined team workflows and enhanced developer efficiency.
Greater website security, uptime, and cost control.

392 of 846

Log Center- Metrics Dashboard

Monitoring of key metrics

Customer Need

Real-time insight into storefront performance, security, and resource usage to quickly identify and resolve issues, ensuring a seamless and reliable online shopping experience.

Solution / How To Configure

Deploy the new Metrics Dashboard for B2C Commerce storefronts.
To access: Go to the App Launcher, select Log Center, then click on Metrics.�

Use Case

Monitor application health, track sales data, oversee eCDN and third-party service performance, and review API and Managed Runtime metrics—all in one dashboard.
Quickly pinpoint performance bottlenecks, troubleshoot incidents, and optimize resource utilization.

Impact

Increases developer productivity by streamlining access to key operational insights.
Reduces the time required to detect and resolve issues.
Supports improved storefront reliability and an enhanced customer shopping experience.

393 of 846

Log Center- Log Streaming

Stream logs into third-party log aggregation

Customer Need

Enterprises require advanced, continuous monitoring of application and infrastructure logs.
Need for integration with existing observability, SIEM, and automation tools (e.g., Splunk, Datadog, New Relic, Grafana Loki, Dynatrace, SumoLogic, AWS Elastic Cloud).
Desire for proactive alerts to identify issues before they impact business ops

Solution / How To Configure

Log Center now supports log streaming directly to third-party log aggregation tools and custom HTTP endpoints.
To access: Go to the App Launcher, select Log Center, then navigate to the log streaming setup screen.

Use Case

Integration with Splunk: Automatically stream logs into your enterprise’s Splunk instance for centralized monitoring.
Set up notifications to alert your SRE or DevOps teams if log streaming fails or stalls, ensuring proactive response.

Impact

Enterprise-Scale Monitoring: Leverage best-in-class third-party tools without manual export/import.
Proactive Incident Response: Notifications prevent silent log streaming failures.
Operational Efficiency: Reduced mean time to detection (MTTD) and mean time to resolution (MTTR) for critical issues.

Custom Jobs Code Analysis

New Business Manager Alerts calling for action

Customer Need

Insight into scale and performance issues that may be caused by anti-patterns in custom code, specifically in Jobs.

Solution / How To Configure

Two new Business Manager Alerts highlight detected anti-patterns to users with access permission to the Jobs Module�

Use Case

A custom job is changing multiple orders per transaction. This can lead to scalability issues and must be modified to only change one order per transaction.

Concurrent modification of order data by a job during during order export. As this may lead to data being out of sync or exported twice, it is recommended to leverage Delay Order Export.

Impact

Proactively identify issues in custom jobs.
Supports robust order processing

398 of 846

Google Address Autocomplete

Marketing Cloud

415 of 846

Marketing �on Core Setup

416 of 846

MC Engagement + Setup Experience

Enabling existing MCE customers to use MoC

Customer Need

Ability for existing Marketing Cloud Engagement customers to access and�utilize next-gen Marketing Cloud.

Solution / How To Configure

Existing MC Engagement customers can gain access to MC Advanced by purchasing the 'Plus SKU' upon renewal.
Once in MC Advanced Setup, navigate to Marketing Cloud -> Assisted Setup -> Assistant Home. Plus SKU customers will be greeted with a welcome mat and also see a ‘Connect Data and Start Setup’ feature card which lays out high-level steps along with progress indicators. From this feature card users are nudged towards the ‘Marketing Cloud Engagement’ page.
‘Marketing Cloud Engagement’ is a standalone page to meet setup needs of Plus SKU customers which lays out detailed steps customers must follow including Connecting MC Engagement with Marketing on Core facilitated via Data Cloud, Installing Marketing Data Kits and Marketing Performance for analytics.
Customers can connect MC Engagement with Data Cloud by entering existing MC Engagement credentials. This connection will facilitate data transfer between MC Engagement and MC Advanced.

Use Case

As an existing Marketing Cloud Engagement user, I want to experience the next-gen marketing products from Salesforce so I can experience next-gen innovations while having a consolidated view of my reporting.

Impact

Unified Reporting in MCA and Agentforce led campaigns.

Marketing Cloud Plus (MCE + MCA)

417 of 846

Marketing Setup Enhancements to Support Business Units

For MC Advanced

Customer Need

Enable enterprise customers to better manage and organize their data �by using Business Units.

Solution / How To Configure

A new Business Unit feature card is added to the Setup Assistant Home page. If no Business Units (BUs) exist, it prompts users to set them up. Once at least 2 BUs are created, the card displays them in a scrollable carousel (up to 10).
On the Basic Settings page, once 2+ BUs exist:

The steps for Install Data Kits and Configure Identity Resolution are replaced by a Configure Business Units section.
Users select a BU from a dropdown to proceed with setup, and Data Kits/Identity Resolution are now configured per Business Unit.

If a user previously configured these at the org level, progress will be mapped to Business Unit #1 (Implied BU) once 2+ BUs are created ensuring no data loss.
Features like Einstein, Marketing Performance and more are now BU-specific, requiring setup within each BU.

Use Case

As an enterprise marketing team having multiple product suites and spanning across Geos, I want my data to be organized and segregated so that I can have specialists work on them individually without any data overlap.

Impact

Organize and Segregate marketing data.

Marketing Cloud Advanced

418 of 846

Mobile App Messaging Setup Experience

MC Growth / Advanced Setup Experience

Customer Need

Facilitate Mobile App Messaging Setup including Push for Android and iOS.

Solution / How To Configure

Customers need to purchase the Mobile App Messaging SKU.
Once the SKU is added to an org, users will see a new Feature Card on Assistant Home called Mobile App which will inform them on their progress and route to setup steps.
Under Channels, a new Setup node for Mobile App is added. This informs the users to configure Push for Android / iOS.
Like all other channel pages, users can track progress using checkboxes.

Use Case

As a marketer, I want to reach out to customers via Push Notifications on Android and iOS so that I can push real time updates and pull them back into the app.

Impact

Unlocks a new channel, better engagement and conversions.

Marketing Cloud Growth / Advanced

419 of 846

Streamlined Permission Sets Assignment

Using the Salesforce Go Modal

Customer Need

Partners have mentioned setup to be “too clicky”, this initiative helps streamline for permission sets are assigned and reduced clicks from 50 to 3.

Solution / How To Configure

Under Marketing Cloud -> User Access, on clicking the CTA for Assign Marketing Manager / Admin perm sets, users will now see a modal screen open up.
This modal will allow them to assign the respective Marketing Cloud Permission Set without ever leaving the page.
Users are also shown how many licenses they have currently used as a measure of adoption.

Use Case

As a marketer assigning same permissions to multiple users, I want an easy way to assign permission sets, so that I can be time efficient.

Impact

Reducing in clicks by 60%.

Marketing Cloud Growth / Advanced

420 of 846

Updated Definition: �OOTB Identity Resolution

Using Identity Match

Customer Need

Unable to map web tracking data to existing contacts AND often ended up having duplicate records when converting leads.

Solution / How To Configure

Two new default identity match criteria have been added to Out-of-the-Box (OOTB) Identity Resolution, alongside the existing 'Normalized Email':

Lead to Contact: Prevents duplicate records when a lead is converted to a contact, even if details like email or middle name change - ensuring a single unified profile.
Device to Known: Matches anonymous web visitors to known profiles once they identify themselves (e.g., by logging in or submitting a form).

These criteria are used as OR conditions in the match logic, allowing profile unification even if email doesn't match.

Use Case

As a marketer, I want a unified profile which auto detects when users logs into the application along with less duplicates so that I can have one source of truth for all user activity.

Impact

Richer unified profile with less duplicates.

Marketing Cloud Growth / Advanced

421 of 846

Real-time Predictive Personalized Decisions

422 of 846

Personalize with Predictive Models

Use real-time predictive models to personalize recommendations

Customer Need

Determining which personalization strategy to serve for someone may be based on various profile & behavioral signals not easily constructed in a simple set of rules.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can leverage real-time predictive model results to determine which Recommender or content to leverage.

To use, build a model in Einstein Studio’s builder, map the model’s inputs to a real-time Data Graph, and build a rule in Personalized Decisions for a Recommender or manual content to render.

Use Case

Score likelihood to churn or purchase and serve up objective-based recommendations meant to address churn risk or increase sales.

Classify customers with where they are on their user-journey based on behavioral signals (or lack thereof) and completed activities, recommend adoption vs loyalty building content based on their stage.

Impact

Improved personalized experiences, leveraging use-case specific predictive and classification models.

Developer, Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited Editions

423 of 846

MoC in Sandboxes

424 of 846

Marketing Cloud in Sandboxes

Safely Build and Test Campaigns

Customer Need

Connect MCE Journeys to Campaigns

Customer Need

Marketing Cloud Engagement customers can associate a journey in MCE to a Campaign for unified reporting across journeys and flows.

Solution / How To Configure

Setup is managed by an admin to connect the MCE org to Data Cloud via the Marketing App setup configuration.

Use Case

As a marketer, I have journeys that have been supporting marketing efforts for a period of time, but I want to start leveraging flows to support some of the outreach. I can connect a journey to the Campaign related to the flows I’m sending for unified reporting and orchestration management from the Campaign record home.

Impact

Marketing Cloud Engagement customers can view in depth analytics in the context of the Marketing App alongside other marketing efforts.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

429 of 846

Flow Summary for Journey Element

View & manage journeys in flow via Campaign record

Customer Need

Once journeys are connected, marketers can use flow to move individuals from flows to journeys directly, or event use the flow to prioritize how an individual work throughs >1 journey.

Solution / How To Configure

In a segment or automation event triggered flow that is associated to a Campaign, associate the desired journey(s) to the Campaign. Next, use the flow element to configure the send to journey element. You will see the element in the flow summary experience, but not the content table experience.

Use Case

As a marketer, I want to send individuals to a journey that I have had running and performing well based on behavior that takes place in the flow.

Impact

More connectivity between Marketing Cloud Engagement and the on platform Marketing App.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

430 of 846

Journey Events in Flow

Trigger Contacts Based on Journey History Events

Customer Need

Marketers can trigger Flow entry or Wait Until release, based on existing Marketing Cloud Engagement (MCE) Journeys, without complex filtering or criteria. These out-of-the-box events listen for journey entry, exit or goal met data from Data Cloud.

Solution / How To Configure

To configure the Flow Event, a marketer simply selects the event from the Event Library, then selects the name of the journey they want to monitor.

Use Case

As a marketer, I want to quickly and easily trigger or release contacts in Flow when they complete key engagement events in my existing journeys. I want to orchestrate use cases when contacts enter a journey, exit a journey or when they meet the goal of a journey.

Impact

Both Flow and Data Cloud now tightly integrate with Journey Builder, allowing marketers to more-easily accomplish a broader range of use cases.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

431 of 846

Send to MCE Journeys from Flow

Orchestrate across journeys with clicks

Customer Needs

Marketers need a higher-level tool to orchestrate, decision, and prioritize real-time customer journeys across the whole of Salesforce platform, including Agentforce, Journey Builder, and Data Cloud.

Solution / How To Configure

Marketers use Flow to decision and enter Unified Individuals into journeys. Journeys must use an Entry Source of type API Entry.

Use Case

As a marketer, I want a single canvas that I can configure with clicks to prioritize & orchestrate across Journey Builder.
As a marketer, I want to build a Flow that uses journeys (MCE sends) alongside next-generation features, such as Agentforce.
As a marketer, I want to more-quickly get my audience from Data Cloud into Journey Builder.
As a marketer, I want to use Flow to real-time decision on my Data Cloud data, and then trigger journey sends accordingly.

Impact

Both Flow and Data Cloud now tightly integrate with Journey Builder, allowing marketers to more-easily accomplish a broader range of use cases.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

432 of 846

Send Marketing Cloud �Engagement Emails from Flow

Efficiently send Marketing Cloud emails to activated Data Cloud Segments

Customer Need

Activating Data Cloud segments to Marketing Cloud Engagement can add to email send latency. Customers want to quickly send emails to segmented audiences.

Solution / How To Configure

Activate a Data Cloud segment directly to Flow to avoid data replication latency. Add the Send Engagement Email element to send emails using content, sender profiles, and consent from Marketing Cloud Engagement.

Use Cases

Monthly newsletter email
New product promotion
Subscriber re-engagement

Impact

Ability to quickly send segment-based Marketing Cloud emails using Flow, without recreating content or sender profiles

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

433 of 846

Journey Decisioning Agent

Generate, edit and share call summaries with a click

Customer Need�Marketers need to automatically select the most relevant journey for each customer and personalize the content within it, moving beyond generic campaigns. This requires orchestration agility to create experiences based on customer data without complex custom code.

Solution / How To Configure

The Journey Decisioning Agent evaluates customer data to select the best-fit journey and create personalized content. Marketers configure this using agent builder, adding use-cases & stage campaign results.

Use Case

Customers identify high-value moments that act as a trigger. At that trigger point, the agent uses available customer data and predefined journey goals to automatically route the individual to the most relevant path

Impact

The primary impact is a higher ROI, driven by increased customer engagement, retention, and conversion rates. It also boosts marketer efficiency and agility by automating manual decisions & improves overall customer satisfaction.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

434 of 846

Unified Reporting & Analytics

Unified Reporting Across Salesforce

Customer Needs

Marketers need a single toolset that can report across Salesforce and their entire customer journey. This toolset should provide OOTB dashboards as well as ability to build custom reports using aggregate and subscriber-level data so marketers can more-easily troubleshoot, audit, and enrich reporting on Marketing Cloud Engagement’s Email, SMS, Push, & WhatsApp messages, as well as the broader customer journey.

Solution / How To Configure

Deploy MCE’s OOTB data bundles, install analytic Data Kits, and use next-generation report tooling.

Use Case

As a marketer, I can more-easily audit MCE sends & troubleshoot issues through subscriber-based reporting tools, no SQL required.
As a marketer, I can use OOTB cross-channel dashboards to view Performance and Deliverability of my Email, SMS, WhatsApp, & Push channels.
As a marketer, I can use a single tool to create reports across the broader customer journey, including MCE, the Salesforce platform (Sales, Service, Loyalty, Commerce, etc) & Data Cloud (GA4, Ads, warehouse data, CIs etc)..
As a marketer, I can enrich MCE channel reporting with custom data & subscriber-based attributes.
As a marketing department, we can more-effectively export MCE data to our system through Zero Copy.

Impact

Marketers are empowered with a unified reporting toolset that more-efficiently helps troubleshoot, audit, and enrich their data, ultimately leading to optimized campaign performance and enhanced customer experiences.

MCE+, MC Growth & Advanced with MCE

435 of 846

Reusable Content Blocks

436 of 846

Marketing Intelligence

451 of 846

Data Space One Support

Keeping data organized and insights focused and relevant

Customer Need

Businesses and agencies struggle to share diverse marketing data across various Salesforce organizations and data spaces. They need a solution to ingest this data into a single source of truth and then efficiently share it with their sub-organizations, which represent distinct lines of business or multiple clients.

Solution / How To Configure

Data Cloud One (DC1) facilitates sharing any data space from a "Home Org" (the single source of truth) to "Remote/Companion Orgs" (lines of business). Configuration involves the Home Org Admin defining connections and sharing data spaces, which are then automatically detected by Companion Orgs, syncing necessary MI data for analysis.

Use Case

A global agency or a global brand, with multiple Salesforce orgs, benefits from its central marketing intelligence team in the Home Org harmonizing all campaign data. This allows client-specific marketing teams or line-of-business marketing teams in Companion Orgs to access relevant, harmonized data to analyze performance, identify underperforming campaigns, and optimize directly within their context

Impact

Improved efficiency through centralized data management and faster optimization, ultimately enabling scalable marketing intelligence efforts with governed data sharing.

452 of 846

Data Pipelines

Seamless ingestion of 3rd-party data in just a few clicks

Customer Need

Marketers need a hassle-free method to quickly import data from 3rd party sources, without getting tangled in complex manual configurations, so they can focus on leveraging that data.

Solution / How To Configure

Data Pipelines automatically tie together essential Data Cloud components and processes behind the scenes, and map 3rd party source fields to MI’s semantic data model. All users have to do is provide their credentials for source authentication.

Use Case

For an individual marketer, having timely, easy access to data from relevant sources is essential for effective campaign management. Using the Data Pipeline, they can ingest new data in just a few clicks, making it immediately available in MI for prompt analysis and action.

Impact

Data Pipelines save time and remove barriers.

*Requires Data Cloud

Supported Connectors:

Google DFP (Google Ads Manager)
Youtube Insights
Instagram By Facebook
Google DS (SearchAds360)
Line ads
Reddit ads

*NOTE: Data Cloud may offer its own native connectors to the same sources. As a result, MI connectors in the Data Cloud list are distinguished by the “for MI” suffix. For more, read speaker notes associated with this slide.

453 of 846

Scheduled Data

Auto-refresh data on a schedule

Customer Need

Marketers need a reliable, automated solution to schedule data retrieval and processing at regular intervals, ensuring up-to-date performance insights without manual intervention. This enables consistent reporting, timely analysis, and operational efficiency at scale—all while complying with organizational data governance policies.

Solution / How To Configure

The Scheduled Data feature allows marketers to automate data refreshes by configuring schedules directly within the pipeline. Schedules can be easily set up from the pipeline view, the pipeline list, or the individual record page—offering flexibility and control. This ensures that data stays up to date with minimal manual effort, supporting timely decisions and consistent reporting.

Use Case

Customers can use the Scheduled Data feature to automatically refresh data at defined intervals, ensuring their dashboards and reports always reflect the latest information. Whether tracking campaign performance, syncing external data sources, or feeding real-time analytics, scheduled refreshes eliminate manual data pulls and reduce the risk of outdated insights.

Impact

Scheduled Data ensures timely, accurate insights by automating data refreshes, reducing manual work, and enabling scalable, consistent reporting across teams and pipelines.

454 of 846

PMO Agent - Additional Channel Activation

Activate optimization recommendations

Customer Need

Marketers need the ability to pause ads across all major channels automatically when performance drops, without manual intervention for each platform.

Solution / How To Configure

In addition to Meta Ads, extend PMO Agent pause functionality to additional channels such as Google Ads.

Use Case

A marketer running multi-channel campaigns wants to automatically pause underperforming ads on all supported platforms without logging into each ad manager manually.

Impact

Saves time by automating pause recommendations, prevents human errors in manual pausing, increases efficiency by managing all channels from one place, without this release, only 1 channel is supported, limiting full utilization of the PMO Agent feature.

455 of 846

Campaign Summary - Objectives

View summary on the user objective level

Customer Need

Marketers need to quickly understand campaign performance not just at a high level, but also in the context of specific business objectives. They require more granular insights to identify what's working and what isn't, and need the flexibility to custom what "good" performance looks like based on their unique thresholds.

Solution / How To Configure

We've enhanced the Campaign Summary by introducing two key capabilities:

Objective-Level Summarization now automatically groups campaign data and generates insights based on the campaign’s objective you've set. It analyzes the metrics most relevant to each objective for a more focused and actionable overview.
Customizable performance thresholds per channel and per objective.

Use Case

A marketing team runs campaigns with varied objectives (Engagement, Lead generation). The team can instantly see that the video campaign is hitting its engagement targets while the sales campaign is meeting its ROAS, giving a clear and accurate view of performance.

Impact

Faster and relevant insights, smarter optimization decisions, increased efficiency.

456 of 846

Custom Attribution Setup

Get any data into the attribution model

Customer Need

Marketers need a single, accurate view of attribution that incorporates all relevant customer interactions. They require the flexibility to source touchpoint, lead, and opportunity data from wherever it lives, whether in standard CRM objects or a Data Cloud data tables.

Solution / How To Configure

We've introduced a custom attribution setup that allows to choose the source for the attribution models as part of Attribution tab in Data Management. The Data Specialist can now map touchpoints, leads, and opportunities using data from either standard Salesforce objects or directly from DLOs in Data Cloud.

Use Case

A company captures rich engagement data from their mobile app and website in Data Cloud, while their sales process lives in standard Salesforce Opportunity objects.

Impact

Holistic view of the customer, increased accuracy, greater flexibility, make better investment decisions with a more accurate understanding of what's truly driving revenue.

457 of 846

Collections

Manage Tableau Next dashboards in MI app

Customer Need

Marketers rely on powerful, custom-built dashboards in Tableau Next for deep analysis, but need to view these insights alongside their core campaign metrics without constantly switching applications. They need a single, organized hub for all their marketing analytics.

Solution / How To Configure

Collections allows to directly embed Tableau Next dashboards into the MI application, in the Marketing Analytics tab. The marketer can group related dashboards into "Collections" to create a personalized and organized analytics library.

Use Case

A marketer uses a set of detailed Tableau Next dashboards for tracking regional sales performance. The marketer creates a "Regional Performance" Collection and add the key dashboards. The marketer can now access and interact with these rich visualizations directly within MI, streamlining analysis and reporting.

Impact

Centralized analytics hub that unify marketing data by bringing essential Tableau Next dashboards, improve marketer efficiency by eliminating the need to switch between different analytics tools, enhanced data storytelling, increase adoption by driving more value from both platforms.

458 of 846

MC Advanced - Mobile App Messaging

459 of 846

Mobile App Messaging

Boost revenue and engagement through mobile apps

Customer Need

Marketers are often reliant on their dev teams to create experiences that encourage users to engage with their brand’s mobile app. Mobile App Messaging is a B2C-grade solution that empowers marketers to send targeted, personalized, pixel-perfect messages to their mobile app users.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can configure the Mobile App Messaging channel via Setup, then quickly start defining segments based on mobile app data, creating campaigns with AI, and orchestrating mobile-first Flows.

Use Case

A marketer designs and deploys a campaign with a series of targeted push notifications to drive users to their mobile app.

Impact

Increases mobile app utility and builds brand loyalty.

Enterprise & Unlimited Editions

Only available in US and Frankfurt data centers as of the Winter ‘26 release.

460 of 846

MC Advanced - Business Units

461 of 846

Marketing Cloud Advanced Business Units

Marketing capabilities to match the structure of the enterprise

Customer Need

Marketing divisions within an organizations need the ability to focus on their own unique goals and objectives, while still aligning to the overall enterprises goals. Additionally, they need to do this in a way where they can trust that data and content are aligned with the correct audiences…all of this while measuring their individual performance, and that of the marketing organization as a whole.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can now create Business Units to act as high walls around a subset of users, data, content and audiences.

Use Case

Whether divisions are based on marketing teams operating in different geographies, on different product lines, or any other reason for separation, each team can team can work independently, but still view performance at an enterprise level.

Impact

Marketers can ensure the correct content is aligned with the correct audiences, leading to relevant and consistent experiences for their customers.

Marketing Cloud Advanced

Edition Only

Only available in Marketing Cloud Advanced edition

462 of 846

Marketing Cloud Data Cloud Integration Enhancements

463 of 846

Marketing Cloud Support for Data Cloud One

Marketing capabilities for multi-org configurations

Customer Need

Allow marketers in connected companion orgs to access data and Data Cloud features from one unified Data Cloud home org.

Solution / How To Configure

Share a Data Space from your home org with a companion org and configure it for marketing.

Use Case

Whether separate Marketing orgs are based on geographic operations, different product lines, or any other reason for separation, org can connect to a single Data Cloud instance, driving a true center of excellence.

Impact

Marketers can use their existing org structure and Data Cloud together, without requiring operational and technical siloing of Data.

Marketing Cloud Advanced

Edition Only

464 of 846

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

470 of 846

Multiple Scoring Models

471 of 846

Multiple Scoring Models

Tailored Scoring for Diverse Business Needs

Customer Need

Different customer segments, like high-value enterprise clients versus small businesses, may need distinct scoring methods.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can create, edit, or delete scoring models from the Scoring Models menu item in Salesforce Setup.

Use Case

A marketing specialist can use multiple scoring models to segment customers based on their likelihood to engage. For example, they can create a scoring model tailored for small businesses and another for corporate executives, applying different criteria to each.

Impact

Tailored Scoring: Addresses diverse business needs by allowing different departments or teams to have unique scoring criteria.

Flexibility: Allows for customized scoring mechanisms for specific industries or customer segments

Marketing Cloud Advanced

472 of 846

Marketing Cloud Data Cloud Integration Enhancements

473 of 846

Account Engagement Form Handler Engagement Data in Data Cloud

Unlock deeper insights with more engagement data in Data Cloud

Customer Need

Marketers seek more engagement data in Data Cloud to create targeted segments and gain meaningful insights.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the Account Engagement connector in Data Cloud and create a data stream for the Form Handler engagement type.

Use Case

Marketers can leverage prospect engagement data from any third party form platform - from forms to surveys to quizzes - to generate sophisticated segments for use in campaigns.

Impact

Marketers can put more of their marketing engagement data into action with Data Cloud for a more complete 360 degree view of their customer.

Account Engagement Growth, Plus, Advanced & Premium Editions

Requires Salesforce Enterprise Edition or above and Data Cloud. Only supported in regions where Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced Editions are supported.

474 of 846

Form Builder Enhancements

475 of 846

Hidden Fields & Default Value Support

Behind-the-scenes data for front-line marketing.

Customer Need

Marketers want short, conversion-friendly forms that don’t overwhelm users.�They also need accurate, consistent CRM data without relying on users to fill in every detail.They want to track attribution (source, campaign, medium) automatically without burdening the form-filler.

Solution / How To Configure

Marketers can now configure hidden fields in forms to automatically capture context, defaults, and attribution without showing these fields to end users. Supported field types: Checkbox, Dropdown, Number, Plain Text, Text Area�

Use Case

On a Product Landing Page, hide a Plain Text field for “Product Name” and auto-populate it based on page context.

For a Contact Us form, hide a Dropdown with “Lead Status = Open” as default.

For Marketing Attribution, use hidden Text Area or Number fields to capture UTM values from the URL.

Impact

Higher Conversion Rates → Fewer visible fields make forms easier and faster to complete.

Cleaner CRM Data → Auto-filled hidden fields reduce manual entry errors.

Accurate Attribution → Marketers can tie leads back to campaigns without extra user effort.

Shorter Forms, Better Data → Balance between user experience and backend data needs.

Only available in Enterprise and Unlimited Editions with Marketing Cloud Growth and Advanced

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

476 of 846

Form Handlers

Bring your own form, connect the data to Salesforce.

Customer Need

Marketers want the freedom to use their own web forms—whether custom-built or third-party—without sacrificing Salesforce integration. They need a way to capture form submissions directly in Salesforce, apply attribution, and trigger follow-up actions, all without forcing a rebuild in UMA.

Solution / How To Configure

Form Handlers provide a secure endpoint that receives data from any external form and maps it to Salesforce objects. Marketers configure the handler in UMA by selecting the target object (e.g., Lead, Campaign Member, or custom), mapping form fields, defining defaults, and setting success/failure URLs. Security controls like honeypots, and domain restrictions ensure submissions are valid.

Use Case

At Bakehouse Co., a developer adds a sourdough workshop signup form to the website. Instead of rebuilding it in UMA, they configure a Form Handler that maps fields like Name, Email, and Workshop Date into a custom Salesforce object. Marketing can then use Flows to send reminders, recipe guides, and promotions, while tracking engagement and campaign attribution automatically.

Impact

Form Handlers give teams flexibility to maintain their preferred form experience while still ensuring Salesforce captures clean, attributed, and secure data. Marketers save time by reusing existing forms, developers avoid custom integrations, and organizations gain reliable follow-up automation, attribution insights, and bot protection.

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

477 of 846

Salesforce Personalization (SP)

478 of 846

OOTB Personalization Permission Sets

Get started quicker by using default persona permission sets

Customer Need

Customers had to create a permission set and define all object and system settings to start using Personalization.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can now leverage the default permission sets defined for an admin and for a channel marketer to assign user permissions.

Use Case

Customers applying permission sets to users with admin or non-admin roles for Personalization.

Impact

Customers no longer need to create custom permissions sets and review help documentation to ensure all necessary object permissions are included. This should help with unnecessary support tickets due to misconfiguration.

Developer, Enterprise, Professional, Unlimited Editions

479 of 846

Batch Personalizations

Extending SDMs offers self-service capabilities on models the user does not have permissions to edit. Extending models can be Users need to know which models are extended, from which base SDM

Solution / How To Configure

From the Workspace list view (and soon the card view), users will be able to extend SDMs. via a new option from the action menu. Extended models will be recognizable via an icon and users will have directly the information of which base models they are extended from.

Use Case

An analyst opens their workspace and adds a reference to a trusted SDM in their organization, which they know well. They decide to directly extend it from the list view to have the flexibility of adding new calculations on the fly when they build their visualizations.

Impact

UX improvement: Adding one more natural “next step” to the analyst flow when dealing with SDMs
Trust: Shows which SDMs are extended and from where

Tableau Next

485 of 846

Mobile - Search and Browse for Metrics on SF Mobile App

Discover metrics business users want to monitor on the go

Customer Need

Business users need a fast, intuitive way to discover and follow metrics that are relevant to their role, especially when they have not yet set up any metrics or want to expand their monitoring to additional KPIs while on the go and away from their desks.

Solution / How To Configure

None for business users / analysts — the experience is available by default.

Use Case

As a Sales Manager, I can discover new sales metrics relevant to pipeline health by searching for “Sales” and browsing other related metrics, so that I can follow the ones most useful to track my team’s progress.

Impact

Business users can quickly expand the set of metrics they follow without relying on an analyst to send them links or going on their computer to follow metrics, ensuring that they are up to date with emerging priorities or changing business conditions.

Tableau Next

486 of 846

Semantics - Row Count

Customer Need

Allow users to report on the total number of rows of a table.

Solution / How To Configure

No configuration needed. This measure is auto created by default with every new data object that is added to the semantic model.

Use Case

The ‘Count of Rows’ measure is often used when users want to determine the total number of rows in a table after applying filters. For example, if I have a table named Email Engagement, I can calculate the total number of emails sent by filtering for Type = Sent and using the Count of Rows measure.

Impact

No Impact - new field will be auto created for every NEW data object in the SDM (post GA).

No Backward compatibility for existing SDOs

Tableau Next

487 of 846

Embedded Following

Providing users access to followed Metrics wherever they work

Customer Need

Users want to access their followed metrics within their usual workflow, reducing the need to switch between different interfaces or tools.

Solution / How To Configure

Use Lightning App Builder and use the New Tableau Next component to Embed Metrics in Lightning Pages. Admin can select metrics to suggest for users, by default on embedding.

Use Case

By embedding a “Follow” feature directly into their workspace, users can monitor important personalized metrics, see cross‐metric summaries, and curate relevant data without leaving their current context.

They do not need direct analyst or admin support to keep tabs on what matters most.

Impact

Promotes faster decision‐making by keeping vital, personalized metrics front and center in the users workflow in Salesforce experiences

Tableau Next

Suggestions to get started easily

Personalized following

488 of 846

Reference line in Visualisations

Enhance data interpretation with reference lines

Customer Need

Data analysts require the ability to define static and dynamic reference lines on continuous axes within visualizations to better interpret data, establish benchmarks, and highlight critical thresholds.

Solution / How To Configure

Analysts can add one or more reference lines to a continuous axis by dragging a field from the data pane onto the "Line" pill on the analytics shelf. These lines can be configured with constant values (number, date/time) or based on field computations (sum, average, min, max).

Use Case

In Sales Rep Command Center, a dynamic quota reference line can be displayed on a Performance Trend chart, automatically updating based on the selected time period and filters.

Impact

Reference lines enable clearer data analysis, facilitate benchmark comparisons, and help users quickly identify significant data points within their visualizations.

Tableau Next

489 of 846

Parameters in Visualizations

Empower users to dynamically interact with their data

Customer Need

Analysts need ways to quickly test experimental values or scenarios without having to create many manual calculated fields or entirely new visualizations.

Solution / How To Configure

Parameters are variables that can be dynamically modified to change the visualization without altering the underlying data. Analysts can create and configure parameters from the Data Pane, where parameters are stored and managed. Parameters can be used dynamically in shelves, calculated fields, and custom field labels.

Use Case

A sales team wants to understand how the average deal size would affect their quarterly revenue forecast, given the number of deals currently in the pipeline. They could use a defined parameter to explore what a larger or smaller deal size would do to their total forecast.

Impact

Analysts can use parameters to build highly interactive visualizations since their flexibility lets users explore a wide range of exploratory questions from a single visualization.

Tableau Next

490 of 846

C360 SDM

A Unified Semantic Model for Trusted Cross-Enterprise Insights

Customer Need

Organizations struggle to get a true 360-degree view of their end customers because data is fragmented across their business. They need a unified and consistent way to understand the complete customer journey.

Solution / How To Configure

C360 SDM is an out-of-the-box, extensible semantic model that provides a true foundation for trusted intelligence. A Data Cloud administrator can install it via a simple setup, which makes the semantic model—and its 30+ predefined cross-cloud metrics—instantly available for analysis.

Use Case

An analyst can quickly start analyzing data across sales, service, and marketing using the C360 SDM to answer critical business questions. They can then extend the model to bring in their own business context—like product usage data—to unlock richer, tailored insights.

Impact

Accelerates time-to-value with a ready-to-use, extensible semantic model that provides a trusted foundation for delivering comprehensive intelligence across the enterprise.

Tableau Next

Beta

491 of 846

Omnichannel - Service Insights App

Customer Need

Ability to analyze the effectiveness and efficiency of different service channels to inform channel strategy decisions and measure cost-to-serve.

Solution / How To Configure

Go to Data Cloud > Data Streams > New > select the org and select service data bundle.
Go to Set up > Service Insights > Complete the prerequisites > Start > Select the Service Rep analytics checkbox and complete the installation.
Assign the users Tableau Next Limited Consumer or Tableau Next Included App Business User permission set to view the analytics

Use Case

Service leaders can identify channel preferences amongst specific customer segments and personalize communications, proactively encourage customers to switch channels for certain type of requests/issues.

Impact

Channel Optimization & Routing Efficiency

Tableau Next

492 of 846

Service Rep performance - Service Insights App

Customer Need

A place to understand the performance of service rep workers. Focused on agent KPIs, discovering gaps in the workforce, quality assurance, and retention trends.

Solution / How To Configure

Go to Data Cloud > Data Streams > New > select the org and select service data bundle.
Go to Set up > Service Insights > Complete the prerequisites > Start > Select the Service Rep analytics checkbox and complete the installation.
Assign the users Tableau Next Limited Consumer or Tableau Next Included App Business User permission set to view the analytics

Use Case

Service leaders are able to view skill gaps in the agent workforce. (e.g., volume by skill demand vs. capacity by skill)

Impact

Service Rep Performance Optimization

Tableau Next

Beta

493 of 846

Knowledge Performance - Service Insights App

Customer Need

Knowledge managers, authors, and service leaders require detailed insights on Knowledge article are helping to solve customers issues and deflect the customer case, which ultimately helps to evaluate effectiveness, ensure compliance, and assess ROI.

Solution / How To Configure

Go to Data Cloud > Data Streams > New > select the org and select Knowledge data bundle.
Go to Set up > Service Insights > Complete the prerequisites > Start > Select the knowledge analytics checkbox and complete the installation.
Assign the users Tableau Next Limited Consumer or Tableau Next Included App Business User permission set to view the analytics

Use Case

Service agents gain the ability to track article engagement, enhancing their understanding of knowledge effectiveness and customer needs. Knowledge Managers access detailed reports on article usage across channels, enabling strategic improvements and compliance assurance.

Impact

Customers can evaluate effectiveness, ensure compliance, and assess ROI.

Tableau Next

494 of 846

Agent Analytics App

Out-of-the-box analytics app on agent performance

Customer Need

Business stakeholders require an understanding of agent usage and effectiveness to make informed investment decisions.

Solution / How To Configure

Provide OOTB agent usage and monitoring insights about the agents such as service agents, Sales Development Representative Agents, & Sale Coach.

Set up > Agentforce Agents >Agentforce Agent toggle (Org perf from set up)
Click Agent Analytics > Install the required template

Use Case

Agent Builders, Business Leaders, Business Users can leverage out‐of‐the‐box agent analytics to get actionable insights about their agent performance and usage.

Impact

Increases transparency into agent performance and usage, helping leaders allocate resources effectively and enabling data‐driven decisions to improve the agents, topics, and actions.

Tableau Next

495 of 846

Detail Panel for all Assets in a Worklist View

Customer Need

Understanding how a particular asset is being leveraged in the ecosystem of an org

Solution / How To Configure

The detail panel of any asset will be available not just in the home page, but also from the workspace list / card view and the different builders experiences. It will have accessible the following list of common attributes as part of this release: Description, created by, last modified by, Source workspace, API Name and Access permissions.

Use Case

User opens a workspace, lands in the list view and is curious to see who has access to the SDM that was created in the workspace. They open the detail panel and get the list of users / groups of users the asset has been shared with and their rights.

Impact

Bring clarity to how assets are being used and leveraged in the flow of work of the analyst.

Tableau Next

Write to Data Cloud

Accelerate your Data Cloud Journey

Customer Need

Customer needs to write CRMA data to Data Cloud.

Solution / How To Configure

Accelerate your Data Cloud journey by using existing Data Pipelines (CRM Analytics Recipes) to write to Data Cloud

Use Case

Customers generating valuable insights in CRMA can push to Data Cloud.

Impact

Leverage insights across Salesforce platform.

TabNext/CRMA

Requires Data Cloud

501 of 846

Viz - Table Mode

Build flat tables with an easy, intuitive UI

Customer Need

Tables are a core format for enterprise reporting, but building them in Tableau often requires workarounds that slow down workflows. Users need a quick, streamlined way to create flat tables.

Solution / How To Configure

Tableau Next introduces Table Mode, allowing users to drag fields directly into a canvas and instantly generate a flat table—no mark adjustments needed.

Use Case

A business analyst needs to share a list of top-selling products by Product Name, Category, Units Sold, and Revenue. With Table Mode, they can build the table in seconds by dragging the fields into the canvas.

Impact

Significantly speeds up simple table creation, boosting productivity and making Tableau more accessible for everyday analysis.

Tableau Next

502 of 846

Concierge in Slack: Q&A with visuals

*Agent-generated viz in Slack in October are images, not yet interactive. Metrics will be interactive in October though!

Customer Need

My team and I need our analytical questions answered in natural language, and we don’t want to leave Slack to do it. We also want to collaborate and act around agent-generated insights!

Use Case

Accessing Q&A on the go from Slack mobile and desktop gives me access to insights at my fingertips like never before. Even better, agent responses are Slack messages. I can share these agent responses with my team so we can collaborate and act around them together!

How To Configure

After setting up the agent in Salesforce, Salesforce and Slack admins can install the same agent into Slack in less than 5 minutes. See setup steps here. Internal documentation.

Impact

Increased team access to insights. Extend the impact of your Concierge experience to the whole business.

Tableau Next

503 of 846

Tableau Next

Customer Need

My team and I want to collaborate around analytics, including sharing metrics and dashboards, as well as viewing existing analytical conversations from Tableau and Salesforce!

Use Case

From Tableau and Salesforce, use new “Share to Slack” action and “View Slack Conversations” action to view existing Slack conversations that mention the metric or dashboard across all Slack conversations you have access to (public and private channels you’re a member of).

How To Configure

Connect Salesforce and Slack (5 min setup, requires Salesforce & Slack admin)
Enable Collaborate from Slack and Tableau Next org preference (Tab Next admin)

Impact

Better cross-team collaboration, and better relevance of analytics because analysts have visibility into stakeholder feedback in Slack

Share to Slack + Bi-Directional Collaboration from Tableau/Salesforce

Enable cross-team collaboration and better feedback loops between analysts and business teams.

504 of 846

Interactive metrics in Slack

Monitor the health of your business with interactive metrics in Slack canvas, including tooltips!

Customer Need

My team and I want to stay on top of our shared metrics, and collaborate around them in a collaborative document.

Use Case

Paste metrics into Slack canvas, where they become interactive, live metrics that respect each viewer’s Tableau user permissions!

How To Configure

Connect Salesforce and Slack (5 min setup, requires Salesforce & Slack admin)
Enable Collaborate from Slack and Tableau Next org preference (Tab Next admin)
TBD if there are additional security settings to configure, we’re trying to avoid that requirement.

Impact

Better team understanding of the health of the business, better collaboration around those metrics to take action together.

Tableau Next

505 of 846

PDS Integration

Customer Need

Customers have made significant investments in their existing Tableau Published Data Sources (PDS) and want to use these trusted assets to benefit from the advanced capabilities of Tableau Next. They need a way to connect their current Tableau models without a costly and time-consuming migration.

Solution / How To Configure

This integration provides a seamless connection between your existing Tableau Cloud PDS and Tableau Semantics. You can create a new Semantic Model directly from a PDS by choosing the "Create From Tableau" option. This process leverages your existing data connectivity and semantic definitions, allowing you to build and enrich models within Tableau Semantics without having to start over.

Use Case

Analysts can now leverage Tableau Semantics to reuse and enrich Tableau Cloud PDS, with metadata automatically updating in the Tableau Semantics UI. This integration eliminates the need to switch back to Tableau Cloud for adjustments, allowing for seamless exploration of familiar Tableau data and utilizing AgentForce's advanced capabilities within Tableau Next.

Impact

Quick start with Tableau Next: Get up and running quickly by using your existing Tableau Cloud assets.
No migration needed: You don't have to migrate any data or semantic definitions to benefit from Tableau Next's capabilities.
Maintain a single source of truth: The integration ensures consistent, governed analytics across your organization while honoring your existing investments.

Tableau Next

506 of 846

Semantics - Table Relationship Cardinality

Customer Need

Correctly configuring the cardinality or referential integrity settings can boost performance through query optimization and reduce query runtime up to 45% and rows scanned up to 14%

Solution / How To Configure

It’s an optional configuration which is part of the Relationships setting

Use Case

As an analyst I would like to have an option to optimize query performance by setting up the exact cardinality between the Data Objects, when I know it.

Impact

Boost query performance

Tableau Next

507 of 846

Semantics - SDM Global Filter

Customer Need

Unlike other Semantic filtering methods (Context filters, Data object filters, etc.) a Global Filter in the Semantic Layer is a wide constraint applied directly to the entire SDM, fundamentally limiting the scope of all returned data and ensuring universal consistency. Tableau users were looking for filter capability such as ‘Filter data source’.

Use Case

As a data modeler / analyst, I would like to filter the entire model so only relevant, pre-filtered data is fetched from the Semantic model

Solution / How To Configure

We introduce a new tab on the SDM canvas (left pane) where we provide the ability to set a ‘Model Filter’. Once applied, it will affect the entire SDM and models and data that is built on top.

Impact

Reduce repetitive setup of the same filter logic in different definitions
Consistent filtering across multiple dashboards/reports
Ensure users / Agents only see relevant, authorized data
The filter will apply entirely for all related models

Tableau Next

508 of 846

Private Marketplace

Create and reuse analytical assets

Customer Need

Analysts need a centralized, governed platform to find and reuse standardized, reusable, and composable assets. Without it, they waste time recreating assets from scratch, doing ad-hoc analysis, face inconsistencies, and struggle to scale analytics across the enterprise.

Solution / How To Configure

Private Marketplace will automatically be enabled within Tableau Next. Private Marketplace comes with a Consume and Author experience.

Use Case

An analyst can use Private Marketplace to quickly find and customize reusable components to create analytical assets in hours instead of days. An analyst can also create, test, edit, and publish a reusable component to Private Marketplace, enabling colleagues to utilize it for their needs, driving consistency, and reducing duplication across the enterprise.

Concierge - 1P LEX Dashboard

Supporting Analytics Q&A on Embedded

Customer Need

Business users want immediate, trustworthy answers from their data - in context, without leaving where they work. Today, getting analytic insights and answers from Concierge requires users switching to dashboards or metrics inside the Tableau Next app, breaking users out of their flow of work and potentially slowing decision making and action taking.

Solution / How To Configure

Analytics Agent equipped with the Data Analysis topic (aka Concierge) will be able to support user Q&A on a Tableau Next dashboard embedded natively in any first-party cloud or app pages in the Lightning web experience.

Use Case

A CRM user can simply open an sales dashboard embedded natively inside Sales Cloud (or any other 1P cloud/app in Lightning), click on the same Agentforce icon they’re used to seeing to select the Analytics Agent, and start asking data/analytics/business questions immediately to get the same trusted Concierge answer as if they are in the Tablea Next app.

Impact

Improves time-to-insight by keeping users in their daily workflow
Increases self-service analytics adoption across any CRM persona
Enables trusted, explainable answers at scale, reducing ad hoc analyst workload

Tableau Next

513 of 846

Metric Summaries with Agentforce

Customer Need

Business users want a clear summary of what’s happening and why with a specific metric.

Solution / How To Configure

Insight summary on the metric details page and top ranked insight on metric card will be powered by Agentforce.

Use Case

For a Sales Manager, summarizing insights on a metric such as open pipeline means less time hunting through dashboards and more time deciding where to act — whether that’s coaching a rep, reallocating resources, or preparing the pipeline review.

Impact

N/A

Tableau Next

Pilot

514 of 846

Sale Insights Intelligent App

Understand Seller Performance & Drive Smarter Revenue Growth

Customer Need

Sales Leaders need in the flow of work analytics insights that make it easy to move from understanding team performance to identifying specific ways to improve.

Solution / How To Configure

Salesforce admins can quickly setup via the Sales Insights page in their org Setup. The page ensures that the minimum org requirements are met and provides step by step instructions for installation. Admins can then embed the metrics and out of the box dashboards within Salesforce pages.

Use Case

Understand seller performance and drive smarter revenue growth
Uncover deal trends to spot risk and focus reps on the right opportunities
Track conversion, uncover top-performing leads, and optimize prospecting

Impact

Sales rep productivity and Quota attainment

Tableau Next in Agentforce for Sales

Sales Insights is packaged as part of Agentforce 4 Sales SKU & A1E and enabled by Limited Viewer PSL

Out of the Box KPIs

Built on

Includes viewer licenses only

Includes 5 Dashboards

Sales Leaderboard
Team Performance
Sales Performance
Sales Stage Analysis
Lead Analysis

Agentforce

515 of 846

Concierge - PDS Support

Unlocking Tableau Next’s AI power without rebuilding your data models through PDS

Customer Need

Customer Need

Tableau continues to innovate on the viz extensions it delivers by driving even more usability improvements into these viz types. With new expanded color controls, conditional formatting rules and new appearance capabilities - viz extensions continue to grow in flexibility and configurations that deliver towards work

Solution / How To Configure

Tableau Built Viz Extensions will be updated automatically with new added functionality.

Use Case

Users can apply colors explicitly for Sankey Level Nodes
Expanded controls for Table Viz Extension header handling, column level filters, and ability to cast Totals
Expanded Conditional Formatting for Tables including ability to drive conditions based on other fields, parameters, or through custom logic

Tableau Desktop, Cloud, Server, and Public

521 of 846

Tableau Radial Viz Extension

Donuts and Sunburst Viz, made drag and drop easy

Customer Need

Radial Viz Types have grown to become a standard for some stakeholders when understanding part-to-whole analysis. While Pie Viz, can deliver towards those goals - we wanted to continue to make more complex variations like donuts and sunbursts easy to author with simple drag and drop

Solution / How To Configure

All Tableau Built Viz Extensions can be found in Tableau Exchange. Viz Extension can be added directly to the workbook directly in the marks card drop down or via Show Me

Use Case

Donut Viz help to visualize contribution of each category to the total, but also want to show the total value as a separate element.
Sunburst Viz help to visualize breakdown across different categories or groups, while also helping people see the proportion of each subcategory within the overall category.

Tableau Desktop, Cloud, Server, and Public

522 of 846

Rest API Batch State Update for Admin Schedules

Customer Need

Changing the state Admin Schedules is an effective way to manage backgrounder load in Server, particularly during Backup & Restore. If Schedules are not disabled, then it causes issues with tasks running during the backup and upgrade which could result in out-of-date references to content. However, this is hard to do manually one-by-one in the UI.

Solution / How To Configure

A new rest API endpoint that will allow batch updates to the state parameter of Admin Schedules.

Use Case

Before backup and restore, the Server Admin can use the API to change the state of all (or specific ones) Admin Schedules to “suspended”. After the restore has been finished, use the same API call to change the state back to to “active”.

Impact

Improved management and scriptability for Tableau Server deployments, especially at scale.

Tableau Server

Programmatically change the state of Admin Schedules

523 of 846

Instant Viz in Show Me

Customer Need

Previously released in Desktop, Cloud, and Public in 256, “Instant Viz” is a new updated Show Me experience that will look to simplify the first steps for visual analysis. Rather than only enabling access to the relevant viz types to data selected, all viz types are available by default and where users can choose the fields relevant to the viz they want to build or even defer to Tableau to help them get started.

Solution / How To Configure

Authors can start using Instant Viz in Show Me

Use Case

As a first time user of Tableau there is so much to learn and explore. With Instant Viz in Show Me we are enabling that first time user to see a viz of their data in just a couple of clicks.

Impact

Users have been using Show me in Tableau since 2005 and it has helped users gain insight into their data by exploring different layouts quickly. While this experience focuses on helping a user continue to explore their data, we saw opportunities to deliver for users who didn’t know how to get started or felt intimidated by their data or what they can do in Tableau.

Upgraded Show Me to help anyone get started visualizing

Tableau Server

524 of 846

Tableau Cloud Pod in Switzerland

Create sites in Switzerland

Customer Need

We have customers who for both legal and performance reasons require their Tableau sites and data to reside in Switzerland.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can create a new site in the Switzerland pod via TCM. There are no additional configuration or steps required other then selecting Switzerland as the region for their new site.

Use Case

In order to comply with Swiss laws, a customer creates a new site in the Switzerland pod thus guaranteeing their compliance.

Impact

Allows customers to migrate from on-prem to Tableau Cloud as they can now have their site and data reside in Switzerland.

Tableau Cloud

525 of 846

External Key Management

Encrypt extracts using External Key Management

Customer Need

Security conscious Tableau Cloud customers can now used encryption keys that are fully managed by them to encrypted extracts on Tableau Cloud. Tableau Cloud will not integrate with customers AWS KMS to generate encryption keys,

Solution / How To Configure

Site Admin in can connect to AWS KMS under their AWS account from Tableau Cloud site. Once connected customers can create, rotate and disable encryption keys in their AWS KMS. The keys from their AWS KMS will be used to encrypt extracts. Customers will have full control over the encryption keys that protect their data.

Use Case

After setup and creating encryption keys from their own AWS KMS. Extracts will be encrypted using keys which are fully managed and controlled by customers.

Impact

Enhances security by providing full control to encryption keys.

Tableau Cloud

526 of 846

Private Connect - Additional Connectors

Additional Connectors for Private Connect

Customer Need

Security conscious Tableau Cloud customers can now connect their AWS data to Tableau Cloud using the AWS Private Link, which provides a secure, dedicated and private connection avoiding exposure to the public internet.

Solution / How To Configure

Cloud Admin in Tableau Cloud Manager will setup and configure AWS Private Link to their AWS accounts where data is stored. Once the Private Link connection is established cloud admin will allow sites to connect over these Private Link connections. Once this is configured, to connect to the database over Private Connect they will use the Private Connect URL provided by Tableau Cloud. The Private Connect URL will be used in the server field of data connection.

Use Case

Private Connect allows Tableau Cloud sites to connect to AWS hosted MariaDB, Dremio Server, Teradata Server, Teradata Vantage Cloud via AWS Private Link.

Impact

Enhances security by keeping the connection to data private and off the public internet

Tableau Cloud

*Pricing and packaging only available as add-on to Cloud Enterprise and Tableau+ edition.

527 of 846

Custom Color Palettes

Create and modifying Custom Color Palettes in Desktop

Customer Need

In Tableau Desktop there was no way to create a custom color palette that could be reused across the workbook or across multiple workbooks. Users had to modifying and XML file outside Tableau Desktop in an awkward user experience.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can now easily create and modifying Custom Color Palettes right in Tableau Desktop with a brand new user experience. In color palette drop downs, you can select Create Custom Palette to launch a new user experience allowing you to quickly create palettes right in Tableau Desktop. The Custom Color Palettes are saved out to the preference file and will persist for future Tableau Desktop sessions so they can be reused across workbooks.

Use Case

Creators can quickly create color palettes to match their desired stylings right in Tableau desktop without having to leave the application.

Impact

Creators can use the next experience to quickly create new color palettes to use to help style their vizzes and dashboards how they want.

Tableau Desktop

528 of 846

Workbook Color Palette Assignment

Set workbook default for Categorical, Diverging and Sequential color palettes

Customer Need

If a creator wanted to set a specific color palette for all vizzes/dashboards, they would have to manually set each viz to the color palette that they wanted. There was no workbook wide formatting setting to do this.

Solution / How To Configure

In Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring, users can now access these new workbook settings via the Formatting -> Workbook settings pane. In the Format Workbook pane, there is now a section for “Color Palettes” and settings for the Categorical, Diverging and Sequential color palette assignment for the entire workbook.

Use Case

A creator can now in a few button click set the color palette assignment for the entire workbook. This helps creators set consistent styling of color palettes across the the entire workbook.

Impact

Creators can quickly set the default palettes for the entire workbook in just a couple button clicks saving them time.

Tableau Desktop, Cloud and Server

529 of 846

Screen reader announcement selection

Choose the quality of screen reader announcements

Customer Need

By default, all screen readers announce the metadata about each mark. Authors can now choose whether the screen reader will announce the metadata or tooltips.

Solution / How To Configure

This is configured at a worksheet level through the Accessibility menu. You can access that menu through the Worksheet menu, Data Guide, and context overflow menu. Once there, selecting the tic box “Use mark tooltip for alt text on marks” will update the announcement.

Use Case�Used by authors to change the type of announcement for marks in visualizations.

Impact

Higher quality announcements creating more meaningful exploration for people using assistive technologies.

Tableau Cloud and Server

530 of 846

Alt text for filters

Add context to filters

Customer Need

Filters are announced using the semantic markup and the title. For people using assistive technology, this may not be enough context. Now authors can add alt text for filters, sharing what the filter does and how it will impact the data.

Solution / How To Configure

This is configured at a worksheet level through the Accessibility menu. You can access that menu through the Worksheet menu, Data Guide, and context overflow menu. Once there, select the filter you want and add up to 2500 characters of alt text. Hit apply to save your content before moving onto the next filter.

Use Case

Authors can provide detailed instructions on how filters impact the visualization(s), what the expected updated data will contain, and more.

Impact

Increased efficiency for people using assistive technology as they will understand more about a filter before deciding to use it.

Tableau Cloud and Server

531 of 846

Drill down without a mouse

Increased keyboard exploration

Customer Need

All customers have the same Jobs-to-be-Done, including customers who do not use a mouse.

Solution / How To Configure

Nothing to configure! You can now explore more areas of a viz and take more actions without a mouse.

Impact

All customers can drill down into their data.

Tableau Cloud and Server

532 of 846

Custom Domain

Use your own domain for secure, seamless access

Customer Need

Custom Domains feature allows Cloud customers to specify a proxy URL domain for their Cloud site instance. This provides a branded experience for end-users and eliminates the need for setting third-party cookies in Embedded Analytics scenarios.

Solution / How To Configure

Obtain TLS cert from a trusted provider. Using the Custom Domain UX in site settings, customer validates and uploads the cert. They are provided with a matching Tableau created domain they use to update their CNAME record. They have now setup a custom domain (ex. tableau.customer.com)

Use Case

Safari mobile users blocked by third-party cookie policies can now access embedded content via a first-party custom domain.
A rep needs quick access to a sales dashboard—no need to remember a complex URL, just go to tableau.customer.com.

Impact

Better Tableau Cloud user experience with a friendly url (ex. tableau.customer.com)

Seamless Tableau embedded integration

Tableau Cloud

533 of 846

Activity Log API

Retrieve Activity Log data using our new REST API

Customer Need

Tableau Cloud’s Activity Log feature is dependent on an AWS S3 integration, which prevents many customers from being able to use it. New API methods in Tableau Cloud Manager have been extended to provide access to all Tableau Cloud sites within the tenant, creating a unified event log API that also removes the S3 requirement.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can access Activity Log files by creating a personal access token in TCM, then calling the appropriate TCM API administrative methods to query and retrieve log files at the tenant and site levels.

Use Case

Admins can write scripts and integrations that batch retrieve Activity Log data to replicate it into their own cloud storage, ingest into SIEM systems for monitoring, or extract into a cloud data warehouse system for analytics.

Impact

Increases availability for customers without AWS infrastructure, and custom integrations. Existing S3 integration remains supported.

Tableau Cloud

Near real-time logs and S3 integration only available with Tableau Enterprise or Tableau+ editions.

534 of 846

Tags in Admin Insights

Analyze tags applied to content by users

Customer Need

Tags are often used to help organize and govern content in Tableau Cloud, but admins have lacked visibility into what content has been tagged with which tags. This makes it difficult to analyze content by which tags have been applied, or enforce tag-based governance policies.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can now access this information in the Site Content data source within the Admin Insights project. “Tags” has been added as a field containing a delimited list describing what tags have been applied to that piece of content. No additional configuration is required.

Use Case

Admins can analyze how many content of what type has a certain tag applied, build custom dashboards to search for tagged content, and apply governance automation based on tagging information.

Impact

Increases visibility into tagged content on a Tableau Cloud site.

Tableau Cloud

535 of 846

VizQL Data Service Improvements

Richer PDS support and easier Python integration

Customer Need

Customers building solutions leveraging VizQL Data Service want more complete access to data in their published data sources, and they want tools to help speed up their development.

Solution / How To Configure

VizQL Data Service now exposes more metadata that can be queried from a published data source, such as groups, bins, parameters, table calcs and calculated field definitions. New ad-hoc calculated fields now also support table calcs. Parameters can be overridden, and new ad-hoc bins can be specified in queries. Additionally, we’ve released a Python library that simplifies development in Python.

Use Case

Query fields in a data source you couldn’t query before.
See the effect of calculation changes by modifying parameter settings.
Leverage the new Python library to speed up development.

Impact

Developer productivity, customization, and analytic depth

Tableau Cloud, Server

536 of 846

Add Related Tables

Automatically add tables to data models

Customer Need

It is often difficult to figure out which tables to add to a Tableau data model and how to correctly relate them in order to answer desired business questions.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can automatically add related tables to a data model when there are foreign key constraints defined in the database they are using. Tableau will automatically add related tables and define relationships between them.

Use Case

When additional data is needed for an analysis, Tableau can automatically add tables and relationships to the data model that are now available for analysis. For example, when looking at sales by customers, automatically adding in geographical information as well for deeper analysis can be done automatically, without the user needing to find and relate the geography table.

Impact

Data model authoring productivity and accuracy.

Tableau

537 of 846

Tableau Semantics connector updates

Available for Tableau Server & additional capabilities

Customer Need

Tableau Server customers will now also have access to this connector and this release introduces the following updates: Re-use curated Tableau Semantics data sources across users and workbooks by publishing. Add groups and bins defined in semantic models to visualizations. Create visualizations using multi-fact semantic models in Tableau. Display images in visualizations without configuration.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can publish data sources using Tableau Semantics models to Tableau Server and Tableau Cloud. Groups and bins defined in semantic models are available in Tableau. Support for shared dimensions defined in semantic models. Image Role fields are automatically configured in Tableau.

Use Case

When refining and extending Tableau data sources using Tableau Semantics models users can re-use the data source across workbooks. Groups and bins allow users to leverage curated business logic. Visualizing measures across multiple fact tables through shared dimensions enable cross-area analysis. Display images from URLs in visualizations.

Impact

Use Tableau Semantics models with Tableau Server. Support for additional semantic definitions in semantic models enable richer analysis seamlessly.

547 of 846

Tableau Agent

548 of 846

Tableau MCP Supports Oauth

Enable customers and partners to centrally host Tableau MCP in production environments

Customer Need

Customers are looking for ways to integrate Tableau into custom and 3rd party agents and applications. Tableau MCP builds on-top of the widely popular mcp standard for making it easy to extend the power of the Tableau platform to deliver better agentic experiences. Now that Tableau MCP supports Oauth, teams can centrally host a Tableau MCP that that accepts requests from distinct users and respects user access RLS policies on your Tableau server. This is a critical step in enabling the datafam to use Tableau MCP in production while adhering to enterprise-grade governance and security standards.

Solution

Oauth Support through whitelisted redirect URIs in new TSM variable
HTTP Transport support

Impact

Customers and partners can start running Tableau MCP in production today!

Tableau Server

549 of 846

Tableau Public

550 of 846

Reactions on Tableau Public

Customer Need

Public is home to our data community which is a collection of authors and viewers. Currently, Public does not offer a way for viewers to interact with content via emoji reactions, which are common in other social and community platforms.

We are introducing a "Reactions" feature on Tableau Public, allowing users to leave simple, emoji-based feedback on visualizations which enables lightweight and meaningful user engagement.

Community/IdeaExchange idea:

Allow Comments, Tags, Votes on Tableau Public Dashboards

Solution

Users can provide their reactions on both the viz thumbnail and the viz itself by choosing from a set of 4 reactions

Impact

This feature offers a simple mechanism for viewers to engage with content in a more meaningful way, which elevates their engagement and retention. It also boosts the engagement of the authors and encourages them to create better content.

551 of 846

Public’s Author Channels

Customer Need

Authors are an important part of the Public flywheel as they generate the content consumed by our Viewers. With Public being the heart of the community, there is a need to highlight these authors and make them more prominent. Though the Featured Authored tile aims at accomplishing that, it’s positioning on the Discover page and its limitation to spotlighting only one author at a time makes it impossible for the authors to be felt.

Our initial milestone was adding an Author Preview Card to individual vizzes and this works builds on to that.

Use Case

Ability to add one or more author channels on the Discover page, ensuring that different faces are spotlighted and the content remains fresh.
Ability to promote specific channels higher on the Discover page for specific campaigns or seasons, eg Iron Viz Finalists right before Tableau Conference.

Impact

We will ensure that the Community aspect of Public shines through to both the existing and guest users. This will drive our engagement and retention metrics, which are captured as part of our V2MOM goals.

552 of 846

Tableau Prep

553 of 846

External Browser Authentication

Customer Need

Today, prep supports authentication using the chromium browser, packaged as part of the electron app. Chromium becomes outdated, fairly quickly, as Google ships fixes for vulnerabilities and updates every 6 weeks. This creates security issues for enterprise customers and some customer face restrictions from accessing Tableau Prep.

Solution / How To Configure

Users will be able to open the server menu and select to authenticate via external browser.

Use Case

An enterprise customer’s IT department has just blocked use of Tableau Prep on Chromium due to security issues. The user can now opt to log in via external browser to continue using Tableau Prep.

Impact

All users will be able to log into Tableau Prep

Tableau Server

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

554 of 846

Prep Agent Updates

Generate, edit and share call summaries with a click

Customer Need

On-prem customers have been asking for access to Prep agent. There have are also customers using Tableau in a variety of languages.

Solution / How To Configure

Prep Agent will be available to on-prem users with this release. Users will be able to access every aspect of Prep Agent. There will also be additional multi-lingual support as we are now supporting Dutch, Swedish, Thai, Simplified Chinese, and Traditional Chinese.

Use Case

Users in the languages above and on-prem users will now be able to access Prep Agent.

Impact

Broader use of the Prep Agent Feature.

Tableau Cloud, Server

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

555 of 846

Write to Databricks

Customer Need

Many Tableau customers are also Databricks customers and would love to output flows directly into Databricks

Solution / How To Configure

Users will now be able to select Databricks as an output option while setting up flow runs. This will output the flow directly into their Databricks database upon completion of the flow run.

Use Case

Customers that are on Databricks can save time and effort by outputting their flows directly into Databricks.

Impact

All customers that use Databricks can now output their flows directly to Databricks

Tableau

Only available in Unlimited Edition. Requires Einstein for Sales GPT & ECI.

556 of 846

In-Database Processing

Process prep flows in your own database

(Snowflake only for the beta)

Customer Need

Customer Need

Today, Tableau Admins do not have a way to monitor Bridge extract jobs in real time and at scale, and cannot easily see the connection status of their Bridge clients. While they can use Admin Views, if they want more information and to connect 3rd party observability tools, they should use Activity log.

Solution / How To Configure

Activity Log can be configured either through the existing AWS S3 integration in the Site Settings page, or through the new REST API integration in Tableau Cloud Manager. Bridge events will appear under the bridge_job and bridge_client_status event types.

Use Case

Tableau Admins can track the status of Bridge jobs using Activity Log and monitor historical performance and success rates of jobs

Impact

Increased admin observability of Bridge Jobs

Tableau Bridge

Near real-time logs and S3 integration only available with Tableau Enterprise or Tableau+ editions.

563 of 846

Bridge on Linux Authentication via JWT

Authenticate Bridge clients at scale

Customer Need

Tableau Bridge clients are currently authenticated to Tableau Cloud via Personal Access Tokens (PATs). Only one type of auth method tied to a user is limiting for larger deployments.

Solution / How To Configure

Tableau Admin will have an automated way to create new tokens, the ability to use a single token across all Bridge clients on a site, and ability to scope tokens to specific uses.

Use Case

Increased authentication options and ways to manage and rotate tokens across multiple Bridge clients.

Impact

Increased security and scalability options.

Tableau Bridge

Available for Tableau Cloud customers

564 of 846

Bridge Monitoring Improvements

More data about Bridge jobs

Customer Need

Tableau Admin cannot currently distinguish between jobs run using Tableau Cloud or run using Tableau Bridge in the Jobs page.

Solution / How To Configure

Tableau Admin will see Bridge information in the Jobs Page for additional job types including Embedded Extract Refresh (Bridge) and Flow (Bridge), and standardized status messages.

Use Case

Tableau Admin will understand their Bridge usage, enable better troubleshooting, and better plan capacity requirements.

Impact

Increased observability and increased efficiency of cost to serve.

Tableau Bridge

Available for Tableau Cloud customers

565 of 846

Salesforce Suites

566 of 846

Free Suite Edition

567 of 846

Sales List Email New Builder UX

New email authoring experience w/components

Customer Need

Sales List Emails are either text-based or use LEX templates, which are not supported and have eventual EOL plans. Customers want a modern authoring experience and integration with other features in their orgs.

Solution / How To Configure

Sales email users can now choose from OOTB layouts to help them build rich component-based emails or start from a blank text composer. The user does not need to add anything to their org configuration; the builder will be present in new and existing orgs.

Use Case

A Free Suite user wants to send a richly formatted follow up email to a recent webinar. They select some contacts, choose Sales email, and select an OOTB layout. They edit the email with their chosen content and insert some merge tags to personalize the message and send it.

Impact

Sales/marketing generalist

Free, Starter, Pro Suite

568 of 846

Marketing

569 of 846

Marketing List Send Experience

Expanded List Filter Options & New Simple vs. Advanced Path

Customer Need

Building upon the usability enhancements the List Send experience brings to SMBs, customers need to be able to select individuals from a list view to send emails to, they may want to switch lists once they start the experience, and they may want to have a more advanced choice of going to the campaign to create a complex flow.

Solution / How To Configure

Marketing users can now select individuals from Lead & Contact list views to send a marketing email to. They can also switch the selected list once in the modal (258.patch) in case the view they started from wasn’t the intended recipient list. Furthermore, they can send a one-time email immediately by using the modal flow experience, or they can jump into a campaign to create a more complex flow.

Use Case

A Free Suite customer wants to send an email to select individuals rather than to a filtered list. They select 10 leads and select an email they created for the promotion and send it, all in a few clicks without navigating segmentation or flows.

Impact

Marketer, sales/marketing generalist

Starter, Pro Suite, Foundations, MC+

570 of 846

Branded Footer in Trial Emails

Salesforce branded footer in trial marketing emails to decrease fraud

Customer Need

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

Impact

Marketer, marketing generalist

Starter Trial & Pro Suite Trial

571 of 846

Reusable Content Blocks in Email

Foster standards and compliance, streamline content creation

Customer Need

Content Managers want to provide approved non-modifiable content that their authors can use to streamline and standardize content creation, while ensuring compliance.

Solution and Use Case

Impact

Author productivity acceleration, Content Manager/Admin can ensure compliance for legally critical items like footers, offers, and heads.

Unlimited

Edition Only

572 of 846

Custom Content Templates

Foster standards and compliance, streamline content creation

Customer Need

Solution

Role-based access control (admins and managers: full access, authors: only use/read)
Use-by-copy (template updates won’t propagate to previously created emails)
All CMS capabilities (e.g. workflows, dependency mgmt., multilingual variants etc.)
2 GP packaging support (ISV requirement)
Review usage card for templates (what content was created from it)
Track the template that a content item was created from (parentage)
Use Agentforce to help generate text content and layouts inside Templates
Authors can use a published content template to create content items

Use Case

Impact

Productivity acceleration, more standardization, and reduced compliance risk.

All Marketing Cloud Editions

573 of 846

Email Usability Improvements

Get started faster with Email

Customer Need

Email authors need to be able to quickly and efficiently create emails without getting bogged down with standard tasks like naming their email.

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

Impact

Email Author productivity improvement

All Marketing Cloud Editions

574 of 846

Common Components

585 of 846

Context Service

586 of 846

Context Filters

Filter and Sort Data in Context Service

Customer Need�Business users need a way to filter and sort data that adapts to their business needs. They don't want to create multiple context definitions or mappings for every small change.

Solution / How To Configure

Salesforce admins can create new filters using the “Filters” tab on the Context Definition page in Salesforce Setup.

Use Case

An Agentforce agent requires to fetch the top 10 open opportunities with the highest value. The admin updates the "Opportunity Context" definition to create a new filter. In the filter conditions, the admin sets the Stage to 'Open', sort order to Amount (descending), and the record limit to 10. The Prompt builder console is then configured to use this filter when building the context, ensuring that the agent is automatically injected with the filtered data.

Impact

Increased administrator agility

587 of 846

Seamless Context Definition updates

Easily Update Custom Mappings in a Context Definition

Customer Need�Customers need to make minor adjustments to their context mappings without disrupting their live applications. Currently, any change to an active context definition requires it to be deactivated first.

Support for Second Generation Packaging

Modern & Automation friendly Deployment

Customer Need�Administrators need a more modern deployment method for BRE Based app that can support Version Control, modular Packages, Dependencies management and foster cross team collaboration & development

Solution / How To Configure

This is a Pilot feature, please Reachout to Product Support for enabling this in your Orgs.

Use Case

I need to package a BRE based application with all its dependencies, and distribute as a standalone package.

Using managed 2GP, you can execute all packaging operations via Salesforce CLI, or automate them using scripts.

Impact

Improved Deployment & distribution of BRE Based Applications

Pilot

592 of 846

Nonprofit Cloud

593 of 846

Program Suites Enhancements

594 of 846

Relax Benefit Assignment Validations

Streamline historical data imports

Customer Need

Customers need to import historical data from previous systems, but current validations block the import of Benefit Assignments associated with inactive Program Enrollments, leading to costly and complex workarounds.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the new org preference "Allow benefit assignments with inactive program enrollments" to relax validation.

Use Case

An organization importing data can now include Benefit Assignments linked to inactive Program Enrollments without encountering validation errors. The setting can then be turned off for everyday use to keep that validation for end users.

Impact

Reduce implementation costs and timelines for migrations to Nonprofit Cloud Program Management.

Nonprofit Cloud & Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking

595 of 846

Attendance Calculations

Track and analyze participant engagement

Customer Need

Program managers lack an easy way to report on attendance rates, making it difficult to understand participant engagement and track key program metrics for funders.

Solution / How To Configure

Clone, customize, and activate the new managed-installed “Calculate Benefit Session and Program Enrollment Attendance Rate” DPE definition and track data in new fields on the Benefit Session and Program Enrollment objects.

Use Case

A program or case manager can now quickly view and report on attendance rates of sessions or individual participants, guiding program optimization and participant interventions.

Impact

Increased visibility into participant engagement and program effectiveness.

Nonprofit Cloud & Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking

Requires DPE and consumption of DPE Processing

596 of 846

Intake Foundations

Efficiently track and triage incoming participants

Customer Need

With many participants all at different stages of the intake process, it is challenging to track where each person is at and what information is still needed—slowing down the process of getting them to the services that they need and letting some folks fall through the cracks entirely

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the “Create and track applications” in the Program Management settings to access the new data model and flexipage supporting the entire intake process.

Use Case

Intake Coordinators can easily track clients through the intake process and report on applications by stage, while seeing all of the relevant information on the new Application Form flexipage.

Impact

Onboard new participants more efficiently

Nonprofit Cloud & Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking

597 of 846

Participant Management Agent Template

Empowering Case Managers to focus on people, not paperwork

Customer Need

After every participant meeting, there is so much documentation to do- it is time consuming, error prone and typically a Case Manager’s least favorite part of the job.

Solution / How To Configure

Use the Participant Management agent template to create an AI agent that helps Case Managers and Program Staff complete their administrative work. The template includes topics for creating notes, referrals, benefit disbursements and tasks as well as a topic for updating goals.

Use Case

Helps Case Managers focus on what they are best at - helping people - with an AI agent to handle their repetitive tasks after meeting with a participant

Impact

Increase Case Manager productivity and documentation quality

Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud & NPC Agentforce 1

Requires Agentforce and the consumption of Flex Credits.

598 of 846

AI Assessment Generation

Quickly create new Assessment Questions

Customer Need

When you already have an assessment in a PDF or DOCX file, setting up new Assessment Questions is a painful copy & paste job.

Solution / How To Configure

After Assessment Generation has been enabled, users can upload a PDF or DOCX-formatted file and Einstein will quickly convert it into new Assessment Questions, which can be added individually or as a set to new Assessments.

Use Case

As a Program Manager, when you are implementing a new assessment type with participants, you can convert your question document into CRM quickly and accurately.

Impact

Set up new assessments faster

Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud & NPC Agentforce 1

599 of 846

Programs Suite Data Bundles

Easily bring Programs and Outcomes data into Data Cloud

Grantmaking Enhancements

613 of 846

Grantmaking Data Bundle

Easily bring Grantmaking data into Data Cloud

Customer Need

Organizations face a significant challenge and cost barrier when manually mapping their Grantmaking data to Data Cloud, which can be a tedious and error-prone process.

Solution / How To Configure

Access the new guided setup experience and the pre-built data stream mappings for core Grantmaking objects under the Program Grantmaking Intelligence setup node.

Use Case

A data cloud administrator can now easily connect their Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking data to Data Cloud with a guided setup and pre-configured data stream mappings allowing them to start analyzing their data for insights and personalization without extensive manual configuration.

Impact

Reduce the time and cost to get started with Data Cloud and accelerate time to value.

Nonprofit Cloud & Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking

614 of 846

Financial Services

615 of 846

Salesforce Go for FSC

616 of 846

Salesforce Go

FSC Feature Discovery and Configuration

Customer Need

Understanding all FSC features and their value is challenging, and configuring them using help documents is often complex and time-intensive.

Solution / How To Configure

Access all Sales, Service, FSC, Compliance and Agentforce features under one single setup page. Filter and Search to identify from the 11 FINS Feature Sets and 66 FINS Features to solve your business problem. Easily activate and configure features. Learn more about a feature with multiple resources at your fingertips.

Use Case Example

Solve for customer onboarding with the Go Feature Set then search for Assessments and easily configure Discovery Framework feature. Finally, monitor its adoption.

Impact

Time to value reduces with seamless discovery and configuration of Salesforce features through a unified experience.

617 of 846

Financial Advisor Assistance Agent

618 of 846

Financial Advisor Assistance Agent

Agent powered assistance for wealth advisors

Customer Need

Wealth Advisors struggle with managing complex client data and delivering timely, personalized advice that provides proactive and tailored financial guidance for clients.

Solution / How To Configure

Get access to 2 Topics and 23 pre-built actions that spans across Meeting Prep and Post Meeting Follow Up.

Use Case

Advisors can achieve post meeting follow ups such as creating financial goals, plans, action plans, and more.

Impact

These actions help advisor improve productivity and save time following up on tasks after a client meeting.

619 of 846

Tableau Next Dashboards for

Retail Banking

620 of 846

Tableau Next Dashboards for Retail Banking

Next-gen analytics for retail banking customers

Customer Need

These dashboards enable retail bankers to provide their clients with a personalized and seamless banking experience.

Solution / How To Configure

One or more Party Financial Assets can be declared as collateral for one or more loan applications. Appraisal details can be tracked using Appraisal related entities. Assets can be pooled using Party Financial Asset Relationship. Insurance can be tracked through Insurance Policy Asset. Covenants can be tracked using Party Financial Asset Terms.

Use Case

Support for collateral declaration, appraisal, lien search, title clearance, chain of ownership, insurance, and covenants tracking, with efficient orchestration of processes. Support for cross-collateralization and pooling of assets for collateralization.

Impact

Loan Officers would be empowered to track comprehensive collateral data for secured loan applications, enabling faster and more accurate evaluation. Tracking of shared and subordinate liens, and covenants, would ensure compliant and up-to-date data for future loan originations

631 of 846

Digital Lending for India

632 of 846

Additional India-specific Integrations

Opt-In Experience for Action Plan Creation for an Event/Milestone

Customer Need

Customers need the flexibility to integrate their own custom workflows for creating action plans instead using the OOTB "New Action Plan" action. The new configuration option provides the ability to hide the OOTB action and directly addresses the need for a seamless and personalized user experience, allowing them to use their custom flows for action plan creation.

Solution / How To Configure

Option to hide the OOTB "New Action Plan" action.
Navigate to configuration panel for the Events and Milestones component in the Lightning App Builder
Select ‘Hide new action plan quick action’ checkbox

Use Cases

A customer hides the default "New Action Plan" button and replace it with a custom button that links to their proprietary action plan creation Flow.

Impact

Improved FSC Adoption

Available in FSC Sales, FSC Service, FSC Sales and Service

639 of 846

Sort Life Events and Business Milestones

Customer Need

Customers want to easily see and understand their life events/business milestones in a logical, time-based sequence. The previous sorting options, "Predefined Order" and "Reverse-Chronological," didn't allow for a chronological view, which is essential for financial planning.

Solution / How To Configure

Use the ‘Oldest First’ sorting option in the Events and Milestones component

Use Cases

A wealth advisor sorts events from "Oldest First" to see the client’s life's financial journey unfold, from their first job to buying a home or getting married. This helps them understand how past events have shaped their current financial situation.

Impact

Improved FSC Adoption

Available in FSC Sales, FSC Service, FSC Sales and Service

640 of 846

Relationship Management Assistant

641 of 846

Relationship Management Assistant

Agent powered post-meeting assistance for relationship managers

Collections specialists often work with Accounts with multiple ongoing Collections. They need a single, real-time view of all collections activity at an account level to make informed decisions and reduce the need for multiple phone calls to the same contact

Solution / How To Configure

A dedicated visualization for all the open collection cases and aggregated KPIs such as total due amount and average days past due. The aggregation calc is performed using a DPE definition which can be configured to run as per required schedule and refreshed in real time. Flex card can be conveniently added to the Account page layout.

Use Case

A fleet Account with multiple ongoing auto loans, some of which are in collections, can now be managed in a single interaction—allowing the debt collection specialist to address all overdue loans during one phone call�

Impact

Reduces the number of interactions required with borrowers and ensures each phone call addresses all open collections for the account—lowering operational costs and significantly improving the productivity of debt collection specialists

647 of 846

Predictive AI Model for Collections Risk Assessment

An OOTB model to identify high priority collection cases

Customer Need

Lenders require an efficient method to identify and prioritize high-risk delinquent accounts to optimize collection efforts and minimize potential losses. This is esp. vital for those lacking the internal resources to develop / maintain sophisticated risk models specifically for collections.

Solution / How To Configure

An ootb predictive model designed to seamlessly integrate with the SF Collections data model. It automatically scores or classifies collection cases based on their risk of recovering the due amount. The Einstein model template can be modified in Einstein model builder and allows lenders to quickly deploy advanced risk assessment capabilities

Use Case

Leverage the predictive risk score to differentiate collection strategies, focusing intensive, high-touch approach on high-risk Collections while managing predicted lower-risk segments with cost-effective, low-touch communication�

Impact

Optimizes resource deployment, enhancing recovery rates from high-risk accounts and improving overall operational efficiency in the collections process.

648 of 846

Banking Service Assistance

649 of 846

Banking Service Assistance

Agent powered assistance to Customer Service Reps. at Bank

Customer Need

CSRs struggle with manual, multi-system processes to log cases and gather customer data, leading to longer handle times and requiring specialized expertise.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the Banking Service Assistance (BSA) Preference to access 16 pre-built topics (Transfer Funds, Transaction Dispute Intake, etc.) and 29 actions. With the capability of IP based Agent action customers can easily customize & configure actions.

Use Case

CSRs create Credit Card Payment Case with a single utterance like "Help customer with Credit Card Payment".

Impact

BSA helps front-office employees manage their tasks efficiently, providing contextual guidance, reducing average handle time, reducing research time and improving workflow accuracy.

650 of 846

Process Compliance Navigator

651 of 846

GenAI Regulatory Clause Extraction

Regulatory Clause Extraction Powered by Embedded GenAI

Customer Need

Compliance Officers need to maintain the regulations in the database. Some of these regulations span 100+ pages; hence it's a laborious and time consuming endeavor to add all the clauses in the system.

Solution / How To Configure

Turn on the following Perm Sets: NLP Service, Scoring Framework Admin, and Compliance Admin
Enable the IndustriesCmplClauseExtrct org perm.
Add the CRUD permissions to OCRScanResult for Compliance Officers.

Use Case

Compliance Officers can significantly reduce their time and effort spent in breaking down regulation documents and adding them to the regulation repository by leveraging AI, which is otherwise done manually.

Impact

Improve productivity, efficiency, cost, and time to value.

Pilot

652 of 846

Console Application

Provide timely visibility to Compliance Obligations & Manage them Effectively

Customer Need

To manage and monitor a wide range of compliance obligations, risks and controls in a centralized place via reporting capabilities to improve transparency.

Solution / How To Configure

Available OOTB

Use Case

Effectively access various modules of this product suite and its corresponding information around the business processes a control manager owns.
Likewise for a compliance officer.

Impact

Comprehensive console app for control managers to focus on reports that provides timely visibility to compliance obligations and manage compliance effectively.

653 of 846

Validation Procedure Enhancements

Extended Support for Apex & API Implementers

Customer Need

IT Administrators should be able to select an Apex Class and/or an API endpoint as an implementer for Validation type controls.

Solution / How To Configure

Can be invoked in Flow with an Invocable Action

Use Case

To configure controls with complex logic that BREs don’t support.

Impact

Enable organizations to embed complex compliance validation type controls in any business process and log an audit trail of the results and executions of these checks in one place.

654 of 846

Digital Insurance

655 of 846

Policy Reinstatement

Reactivate cancelled policy

Customer Need

Ability to reinstate/ reactivate a cancelled policy.

Solution / How To Configure

Customer can create an Omniscript for Reinstatement by consuming OTB Reinstatement API. They can also go the Salesforce flow route by consuming OTB Reinstatement Invocable Action.

Use Cases

Ability to reinstate/ reactivate a cancelled policy
Support for both continuous and gap Reinstatement
Reinstatement Transaction

Impact

Regain policy holder & premium revenue.

656 of 846

Out of Sequence Endorsement

Backdated change of policy

Customer Need

Ability to do a backdated change on a policy when policy version(s) with effective date later to this date is already present.

Solution / How To Configure

Customer can create an Omniscript or Invocable action for Out of sequence endorsement by consuming the OTB API or Invocable Action.
Salesforce standard monitoring APIs can be consumed for progress monitoring.

Use Cases

Ability to make backdated change on a policy in current / past/ future policy term
Out of Sequence Endorsement Transaction

Impact

Flexibility of Endorsements/ modification of policy

657 of 846

Insurance Service Assistance Agent

658 of 846

Insurance Service Assistance Agent

Policy servicing assistance for customer service representatives

Customer Need

Customer Service Representatives should be able to efficiently generate the Proof of Insurance document for a policyholder

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the Insurance Service Assistance (ISA) Preference to access 2 pre-built topics (Insurance Summarization, Policy Servicing) and 6 actions. Use the Insurance Service Assistance agent template to create an agent with out of the box ISA topics and actions.

Use Case

CSRs can create Proof of Insurance with a request to AI agent like "Generate Proof of Insurance for this customer".

Impact

ISA helps customer service employees of the insurers, to efficiently handle customer requests leading to reduction in average customer call handling time and improved customer satisfaction

659 of 846

Education Cloud

660 of 846

Education Cloud

Data Foundation Enhancements

661 of 846

Data Cloud File Based Data Kit

Building the Foundation of Data for Education Cloud

Customer Need

Institutions have siloed systems with fragmented Applicant, Student, Alumni, and Donor data. They need a simple way to bring data together for analysis, engagement, and AI use.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins navigate to Data Cloud. Choose the Data Stream Tab. Click on New Data Stream. Choose from the pre-configured Education Cloud data bundles.

Use Case

A business user can quickly unify data from multiple sources into a single view, enabling faster and more informed decision-making.

Impact

Time to Value
Single source of truth for institutional data

EE/UE

Requires Data Cloud

662 of 846

Recruitment & Admissions

663 of 846

Applicant View & Edit Experience

Access application stages through the entire lifecycle

Customer Need�Applicants need the ability to view, edit, and proofread each application stage prior to submission, and retain view access after submission.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the View and Edit experience on the Application Details Lightning Web Component. Use the component with the included Profile, Test Results, Secondary or High School Education, College or University Education, and Files OmniStudio components, or develop your own.

Use Case

After an applicant completes the Test Scores stage, they realize a new score needs to be added.

Impact

Applicant satisfaction and productivity

EE/UE

Idea Exchange�Request

664 of 846

Application Submission

Enable applicants to certify and submit applications

Customer Need

Applicants need the ability to certify and then submit their admissions application. Admissions staff can then begin to process the submitted application.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable the Certification (Confirmation) and Submission experiences on the Application Details Lightning Web Component.

Use Case

After an applicant has proofread their application, they confirm the accuracy of their application, and then submit it.

Impact

Applicant and Reviewer productivity

EE/UE

Idea Exchange�Request

665 of 846

Application Material Enhancements

Give applicants more control over their prefilled materials

Customer Need

Applicants need the ability to select which existing application records and materials, such as educational histories, test scores, and related files, should be included in the admissions application.

Solution / How To Configure

Clone the updated Test Results, Secondary or High School Education, College or University Education, and Files OmniScript components, enable and select them as Application Render Methods in Dynamic Applications.

Use Case

An undergraduate student who is applying to the same institution for a graduate degree has an existing SAT record which should be omitted from the graduate application.

Impact

Applicant and Reviewer productivity

EE/UE

666 of 846

Student Recruitment Agent Actions

Instantly scale your admissions team

Feature

Answer prospective students’ questions, capture and qualify Academic Interests, register for campus tours, and other group admissions events, and begin an admissions application.

Solution / How To Configure

Expose the Agentforce Student Recruitment Agent to prospective students through Experience Cloud, SMS, and other supported Digital Engagement channels. Publish Knowledge articles. Configure and expose tours as Campaign records. Activate included Flows, Topics, and Actions.

Use Case

During the application process, prospective students ask many questions, need to register for campus tours, and need help getting their admissions application started. Institutions need to identify, track and manage prospects’ contact, desired term and learning program data.

Impact

Application yield and Recruiter productivity

EE/UE

Beta

667 of 846

Student Success

668 of 846

Career Planning & Goal Setting - Portal UI

Seamless & integrated experience for getting students career ready

Customer Need

Students need to grow & develop holistically by aligning their interests, values, and campus involvement with career goals - helping them build skills and stay on track to achieve their life goals.

Solution / How To Configure

Institutions configure the assessments library, involvement group tracking, and goal-setting components on portal. Students complete assessments, track out of class activities, set goals, and build a dynamic skills portfolio.

Use Case

A student takes a preferences assessment, sets a goal to study abroad, explores global leadership programs on campus, logs participation in an international club, and adds related skills to their portfolio.

Impact

Graduation rates, Retention rates

EE/UE

669 of 846

Student Goals Agent

Tailored recommendations for accelerated career readiness

Customer Need

Students need personalized guidance to explore and set SMART career and life goals across domains and timeframes. They also need support in identifying and leveraging the right campus resources - such as courses, involvement opportunities, and support services - to build actionable plans and achieve their goals.

Academic Operations

674 of 846

Course Search Custom Fields

Customize visible course search fields

Customer Need

Students need a way to see relevant information and requirements when searching and registering for courses. This information may apply to either the Learning Course or Course Offering. Similarly, registrars need a way to convey this additional information to students.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can make additional fields visible on the Course Search Results, Course Details, and Course Section Details UI by going to the configuration panel of the Course Search component in the Builder for their Experience Cloud site.

Use Case

Juan, Astro University’s registrar, wants students to be able to view a Learning Course’s language of instruction when browsing for courses. He adds a custom field, Language of Instruction, to the Course Search Results component so students can easily see this information.

Impact

Increases visibility and transparency of course information and requirements

EE/UE

675 of 846

Configure Linked Sections

Guide students to register for all required components of a course

Customer Need

At some institutions, certain courses are composed of multiple components that need to be taken together, such as a lecture, lab, and exam. Registrars need a way to configure these connections, and students need a way to understand which components must be taken together.

Solution / How To Configure

Create Learning Courses for secondary components marked as Linked Only, then create the primary Learning Course and relate the secondary components in the Learning Wizard. Then, create Course Offerings for each component and link them by clicking on Manage Linked Sections from the Course Offering record page.

Use Case

Intro to Biology has both a lecture and a lab component. The registrar configures these as linked sections. Students must now select a lecture section and lab section in order to successfully register for Intro to Biology.

Impact

Increases visibility and transparency of course information and requirements

EE/UE

676 of 846

(Agentforce for Education) Course Search

Help students and advisors discover the right courses easily.

Customer Need

Students waste time browsing through course catalogs to find courses that match their interests, schedules, and program requirements.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can add the Course Search FAQ topic to an Agentforce Service Agent which includes the Get Learning Course Data action. Build a custom retriever in Data Cloud to fetch Learning Course Data. Once deployed, students can interact with the agent and ask questions about these courses.

Use Case

Sophia Student is considering switching her major to Computer Science. She asks an agent “I’m considering a major in CS. Which classes should I take first?” The agent uses the Course Search FAQ topic and related action to recommend “CS 101: Introduction to Computer Science.”

Impact

Increases visibility and transparency of course information and requirements

EE/UE

Beta

Agentforce

677 of 846

Degree Planner Custom Rules

Tailor the degree planning experience to your policies

Customer Need

Institutions may have complex rules which impact degree planning and registration processes. These rules need to be made visible to students so that they can plan accordingly and avoid surprises down the line.

Solution / How To Configure

Users define policy rules based on institution-specific policies in Business Rules Engine. Then, select the policy rule via the Expression Set tab within the Learning Wizard to apply the rule. These rules surface as warnings when students plan these courses in the Degree Planner.

Use Case

At Astro University, students who have already taken BIO 103 cannot receive credit for BIO 101. The admin configures this as a policy rule, then applies it to BIO 101 using the Expression Set tab in the Learning Wizard. Sophia gets a warning when she plans BIO 101 in Degree Planner after having passed BIO 103.

Impact

Increases visibility and transparency of course information and requirements

EE/UE

678 of 846

Windows - Student Assignment

Enable an organised and equitable registration process

Customer Need

The Academic Term Registration Timeline (Registration Window) entity governs the timing, procedures, and conditions under which students can register for courses.

Solution / How To Configure

Academic Term Registration Timeline (ATRT) workflow is available as part of base/core Education Cloud skus. Admins need to turn on the advanced academic operations preference from setup to access features built on this entity.

Use Case

A university intends to establish two registration windows: one for international students and another for resident students. Accordingly, registrars or staff can create two entries in the ATRT, defining eligibility criteria based on student status, registration dates, and other relevant fields for each window

Impact

Increases registrar productivity

EE/UE

679 of 846

Holds & Blocks - Rule-Driven Creation

Differentiated offering to simplify assignment of holds

Customer Need

Manually placing holds on each student can be a heavy task. Registrar can define Rules (expression sets) that can be evaluated in context of a student/Academic year and create flows to automatically place holds.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins needs to turn on the advanced academic operations preference from setup. Admin defines policy rules and associates it to compliance control entities, then creates a flow to evaluate rules and place holds using OOTB invocable actions.

Use Case

An organisation wants to automatically evaluate holds for a set of students. It wants to make sure the right restrictions are placed, the right action and advice is provided to students who are not in compliance.

Impact

Increases Registrar Productivity
Increases policy compliance
Increase transparency w.r,t organisation policies and compliance

EE/UE

680 of 846

Recognition of Prior Learning & Transfer Credit

Model learning equivalencies and credit transfer requests

Customer Need

Institutions struggle with manual transfer credit processes that are time-consuming, error-prone, and apply credit inconsistently. This creates a poor experience for both the administrative staff and the students awaiting a decision.

Solution / How To Configure

All entities is available as part of base/core Education Cloud skus. Admins configure Learning Equivalency rules to define how external courses map to internal requirements. Admin can create flows to update transfer credits and learner progress

Use Case

A registrar can create a Course Credit Transfer Application record to model the request and manage all related data in one place.

Admins can use the Learning Equivalency object and its related entities to model and store a comprehensive catalog of transfer rules.

Impact

Increases Registrar Productivity

EE/UE

681 of 846

Pre/Co-Requisites

Designate courses which may be taken before or together with another

Customer Need

At some institutions, there are courses which may be taken prior to (prerequisite) or together with (corequisite) another course.

Solution / How To Configure

Similar to adding a prerequisite or corequisite, add a pre/corequisite in the appropriate tab in the Learning Wizard.

Use Case

A registrar can make Introductory Statistics a pre/corequisite of Psychological Field Methods, meaning students can take Introductory Statistics in the same or prior term as Psychological Field Methods.

Impact

Increases visibility and transparency of course information and requirements

EE/UE

682 of 846

Consumer Goods Cloud

683 of 846

Agentforce & Intelligence

684 of 846

Mobile App Agents

Customer Need

Supporting field users to increase efficiency in sales and merchandizing activities with the help from Agentforce.

Solution / How To Configure

Generic capability to integrate Agentforce in the of the Mobile App

Use Case

Integrate Agentforce skills into the Mobile App by partners and customers

Impact

User satisfaction and efficiency

Pilot

685 of 846

Customer Need

Key Account Managers have to look into huge volumes of data and analyse and understand when making decision while planning promotions

Solution / How To Configure

Setup KAM agent actions and enable key account managers with the required permissions

Use Case

Agent gives insights into specific account and brings the KPI data based on user input
Agent gives comprehensive insights into product category and promotion performance for an account
Assist with updates such as adding a new slogan/change validity/ add products in existing promotions

Impact

Increases efficiency & helps Key Account Managers make efficient decisions

Enhance Productivity with KAM Agent (Trade Promotion Management)

Off Cycle release

686 of 846

Planning with TPM

687 of 846

Liability Accruals

Customer Need

Support the process from approving Non OI tactics to accrual calculation and posting and finally accrual reporting

Solution / How To Configure

Flexible Definition of accrual-relevant tactics
Accrual Engine running on data cloud supporting 2 basic accrual types (variable and fixed)
Process to check for claim overspends
Promotion Closure process
Accrual Visibility within the promotion and via Reporting (using CRM Analytics)

Use Case

Accruals allow manufacturers to recognize an expense as soon as it is due, and not when it is claimed for.

Impact

Closing the loop from planning to financial execution and reporting by considering accrued liabilities

688 of 846

Flexible Bill of Material Planning

Customer Need

Support the business process for BOM Planning in North America in addition to the BOM Planning Process in Europe

Solution / How To Configure

BOM Setup and Promotion Planning using BOM Header and BOM Components
Aggregation of BOM Component KPIs to the standard product instead of the BOM Header
New KPI Type to aggregate into the standard product instead of the header -up to 15 KPIs of this type are supported

Use Case

KAMs want to plan and analyze the impact of multi-brand or multi-category BOM’s against the different product hierarchy levels in the Promotion P&L as well as customer business plan

Impact

More accurate consideration of BOM volumes in promotions and customer business planning

689 of 846

Support for more Push Promotions

Customer Need

The push promotion process needs to work seamlessly for all customers, including the ones with large data volumes

Solution / How To Configure

Address high user activity and concurrent large scope promotion pushes
Overcome on-platform dependency on Apex queue handling
Support an updated set of volumetric non-functional requirements
Activation possible with a custom setting

Use Case

Brand Managers and Category Planners need to mass distribute their plans to the key accounts as fast as possible

Impact

Increases stability and performance of the push promotion solution for large volume customers

690 of 846

Abort KPI Export Process

Customer Need

Need for reliable and controllable export processes which rely on data being exported to downstream financial and forecasting systems within defined timeframes

Solution / How To Configure

New API development to abort KPI Export processes
API turns the status of an export process from in progress or queued to “aborted”.
To provide a consistent view to the TPM and integration admin, we need to provide another API which returns the full list of all export processes:

For a given timeframe, together with their status, their queue-in time, execution start and end time

1. New permission set for route based sales rep/ merchandiser

2. New user role for route based sales rep/ merchandiser

3. Sync configuration to sync corresponding tours and visits on the user mobile app.

Using these artefacts, customer can build the UI experience for sales rep/ merchandiser

Impact

Route based field assignment as required by Pepsico

Atlanta Route

Route

Stores

Sales Rep

Requires CGCDirectStoreDeliveryOfflineAddOn-1 add-on licence �(included in Field Sales & Strategic Sales CG Cloud Retail Execution SKUs)

DSD (Direct Store Delivery) - �Route Based Sales and Merchandiser

695 of 846

Customer Details in Map View

Customer Need

Easy view of customer details without any need to switch tabs.

Solution / How To Configure

Maintain address in account master data.

Use Case

Store name and address shows up in a dialog when the store’s pin icon is clicked in the map.

Impact

Improved user experience.

696 of 846

Customer Need

Persist values calculated by the Penny Perfect Pricing (PPP) engine in Pricing Info Fields

Solution / How To Configure

Do the necessary set up in calculation schema to persist PPP calculated values in Pricing Info Field

Use Case

In project-based implementations, Pricing Info fields can be configured to store and utilize dynamic, intermediate values—such as Sales Rep Commission—based on order value

Impact

The pricing information fields are persisted to the database automatically with the PPP calculation . Additionally customer can leverage Ui Extensibility to show the pricing fields from the Penny Perfect Pricing (PPP) engine on desktop orders.

PPP Enhancements with Pricing Information Fields Persistence

697 of 846

Customer Need

Product filters such as Brand and Category are presented independently, leading to irrelevant or overwhelming filter options.

Enable cascading filter logic within the Desktop Order interface, where selection of a Category dynamically narrows the available Brand options to only those relevant to the chosen category.

Solution / How To Configure

Customer can activate cascading filters via setting

Use Case

A sales rep placing an order for ‘beverages’ category select beverage filter, and the Brand filter instantly updates to show only relevant options

Impact

Cascading filters dramatically reduce product search time enabling faster, more accurate order placement

Advanced Order Enhancements with Cascading Filters

698 of 846

Shift Management Foundation

Customer Need

Accurate tracking of working time and location of shifts via explicit clock-in / out

Solution / How To Configure

Foundational objects to store shift related information :

Shift - Store actual shift related data of a user
Shift Template - Store configurations needed for shift management.

Summarize stock levels and initiate replenishment through product requests, leveraging LLM-based intelligence to recommend optimal source locations and quantities.

Impact

Employee Productivity

704 of 846

Batch Inventory Management

Manage, Search and Transfer Batch Inventory

Customer Need�Ability to find, transfer and manage inventory with enhanced batch level details and search capabilities

Solution / How To Configure

Users can now access batch level details for both serialized and non-serialized products directly within inventory records. To enable search across batch inventory, administrators can configure the Criteria Based Search and Filter feature by creating a search configuration using the Product Inventory Batch Searchable Fields object, which can be kept up-to-date using the pre-built "Update Product Inventory Batch Searchable Field Values" Data Processing Engine template.

Use Case

An inventory manager can get visibility into inventory including specific batch level details across all service locations and warehouses. They can instantly locate product/part belonging to a specific batch and transfer them or take any relevant action.

Impact

This granular, batch level visibility into inventory improves tracking accuracy and enables better decision making

705 of 846

Customer Need

Ability to manage product recalls, upgrades, and maintenance with an out-of-the-box comprehensive data model. This end to end data model allows for streamlined campaign definition, planning, and execution.

Solution / How To Configure

Activate the org preference and assign the required user perms to start seeing the data model objects. Leverage the out-of-the-box data model to model the definition and execution plans for various campaigns, define involved stakeholders, manage partner communication and unsold inventory, schedule appointments etc.. Customers can tailor the data model and bring in process automations, as needed.

Use Case

Enable OEM organisations manage the various service campaigns definition and execution like Recalls, Upgrades and Maintenance campaigns.

Impact

Operational efficiency

Product Service Campaign Definition Management

Orchestrate diverse service campaigns with an OOTB data model

706 of 846

Enhanced Asset Data Sharing

Customer Need

Assets requires granular sharing as only the active owner/dealer can see details of assets/vehicles they own.

Solution / How To Configure

Asset data sharing participant and Complaint data sharing help users to flexibly share assets

Use Case

Control access to assets based on participant role such as owner, and dealer

Impact

Operational efficiency
Improved compliance
Reduced cost

Enhanced sharing of assets with internal and external users flexibly using asset data sharing participant entity

707 of 846

Customer Need

Organizations need a way to holistically manage telemetry definitions and create remote actions easily for connected assets

Solution / How To Configure

Use telemetry definitions for standardizing telemetry data used for remote actions

Declaratively create remote/telemetry actions; this results in generation of intake UI and underlying fulfillment process automatically

Use Case

Request intake and fulfillment supported for Employee and Customers to self serve and submit service requests

Impact

Operational efficiency
Reduced cost

Requires Connected Assets add on SKU

Telemetry Definition and Action Management

Standardize telemetry definitions and declaratively create telemetry actions

708 of 846

Kanban Support for Fleets

Kanban view provides a visual and interactive way to manage records and tracking through different stages. Asset and Fleet entities are enhanced to support Kanban view

Customer Need

Visually and interactively manage fleets

Solution / How To Configure

Kanban view is enabled for fleets

Use Case

Manage and interactively manage fleets by status

Impact

Enhanced fleet management

709 of 846

Customer Need

Ability to perform multiple updates to Forecasts metrics at a given time.

Solution / How To Configure

Planners can now use the new datable to make edits to forecasts. Data table includes features

Freeze Columns and row header
Ability to have trail history
Ability to have text wrap for columns(resize columns), including Scrolling
Navigation to the group of cells, through keyboard tabs
Ability to Undo Changes

Use Case

As an Account Manager, I would like to create, update forecasting records in very easy manner . Today it’s not possible to use the Manufacturing Cloud Forecasting as it takes me 5 -8 hrs to enter simple monthly forecasting data

Impact

Improved Efficiency for Account Managers which accelerates adoption of Manufacturing Cloud

Intuitive Spreadsheet-Like Experience for Advanced Account Forecasting

Accelerate Sales Manager productivity with user-friendly forecasting sheets.

Customer Need

Explore new and unused salesforce features to aid in achieving business goals

Solution / How To Configure�A new platform Salesforce Go has been introduced to explore new and unused features. Admins have the options to quickly setup, monitor and drive feature adoption

Use Case

As an administrator i would like to know all the salesforce licences subscribed by my organisation and i should be able to deepdive into specific feature in a particular cloud.

Impact

Enhance operational efficiency by setting features in minutes and monitor and drive adoption

Onboarding Salesforce Go - Manufacturing Cloud

A single platform to realize value from your Salesforce investment

714 of 846

Multi-Currency Support in Partner Lead Management

Organizations need multiple currencies as part of their business process. This enhancement enables multiple currencies as part of the partner lead management

Customer Need

Ability to support multiple currencies as part of Automotive lead management so that multiple currencies are considered during lead to opportunity conversion

Solution / How To Configure

Enable partner lead management and map currency conversions using ISO currency codes in partner lead to opportunity conversion

Use Case

Supporting multiple currencies in partner leads and supporting them during lead to opportunity conversions

Impact

Enhanced conversion of leads with multi-org support

715 of 846

Enhanced Product Management with Model Year Version Support

Model year support enables organizations to plan and support versions with in a model year thereby enabling granular management

Customer Need

Model multiple versions of a product with in a single year

Solution / How To Configure

Model Year Version is available as an optional field on product2 entity

Use Case

Effectively model and manage multiple versions of a product such as 2025.2 for a vehicle model

Impact

Improved product management

Customer Need

Model multiple versions of a product with in a single year

Solution / How To Configure

Model Year Version is available as an optional field on product2 entity

Use Case

Effectively model and manage multiple versions of a product such as 2025.2 for a vehicle model

Impact

Improved product management

Enhanced Product Management with Model Year Version Support

721 of 846

Home Health

Enhanced Scheduling Patterns and Medication Administration for Home Health

Customer Need

Home Health Providers would need to schedule Bi-Weekly, Monthly patterns as per the regional requirements. Administering Medication and capturing this information in FHIR entities is a central requirement of Home Health agencies.

Solution / How To Configure

Flexible pattern along with End Date based scheduling allows for the customers to schedule for any desired pattern of visits. With the changes made to the Medication Administration flow, now the Medication Administration adheres to the FHIR standards

Use Case

Schedulers need to be able to schedule as per the need of the patients. Care Workers need to be able to capture the Medications Administered appropriately.

Impact

Elevates quality of care in the shortest time, allowing to serve more patients while reducing claim denials and accelerating on-time payments while ensuring adherence to compliance

Enterprise Edition �& above

722 of 846

Disease Surveillance

Enhanced Case Creation, document extraction and deduplication capabilities

Customer Need

The current disease surveillance process is slow and error-prone, with manual data entry causing duplicates and delays, limiting public health officials’ ability to quickly monitor and contain outbreaks.

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can enable Disease Surveillance User Preference under Public Health settings in Setup with Health Cloud SKU.

Use Case

Public health professionals, such as Case Managers and Investigators, can use Agentforce to automatically create diseases, process multiple documents in bulk to create cases, and automatically deduplicate incoming records. Agentforce also enables case and investigation summarization. Users also have a visual network graph to track infection spread across contacts for a case.

Impact

Improve productivity, efficiency and helps with faster decision making.

Enterprise Edition �& above

723 of 846

Integrated Care Management

Reduce manual effort & connect assessments for comprehensive care

Customer Need

Care Managers spend time re-entering data already available with them, lose progress during interruptions, and struggle to link related assessments for holistic care planning.

Solution / How To Configure

Easily configure OOTB Integration Procedure (IP) to enable pre-fill responses for Custom and MCG Assessments; Map responses to trigger secondary Assessment for extended care needs; Enable pref for seamless Save experience and continue working with Assessment

Linked Assessments

Use Case

A Care Manager sees pre-filled responses from past assessment, saves mid-assessment, and later completes a linked Assessments based on submitted responses for driving comprehensive care outcomes

Impact

Reduces repetitive data entry and cognitive load for Care Managers; Improves assessment completion rates and care plan comprehensiveness.

Enterprise Edition �& above

724 of 846

Utilization Management

Payer support for all primary and secondary CDS Hooks

Customer Need

Providers use CDS Hooks to initiate Coverage Requirements Discovery (CRD), a process that determines if a prior authorization (PA) is needed. Under FHIR mandates, health insurance companies must support primary CDS Hooks. Since these hooks have different request payloads, customers are required to validate and process each request.

Solution / How To Configure

Out of Box implementation to support all the primary hooks (order-sign, order-dispatch, appointment-book) and secondary hooks(order-select, encounter-start, encounter-discharge) by validating the incoming requests and provides the PA Need and coverage information. Customers can customize to their needs

Use Case

Orthopedician signs an order for knee MRI scan for a patient in EMR. The EMR sends an order-sign request to the payer to respond CRD outcome of PA need and coverage determination.

Impact

Reduces customer implementation time to support all the primary and secondary CDS Hooks.

Enterprise Edition �& above

725 of 846

Clinical: Site Mgmt: Site Selection Agent

Assistive Agent to accelerate Site Identification & Feasibility

Customer Need

Site Feasibility leads spend a lot of time to identify, shortlist, evaluate and activate sites & investigators for clinical trials based on participant recruitment potential, site capabilities, operational efficiency and regulatory compliance

Solution / How To Configure

Users can leverage the Site Selection Agent topic and actions for site and investigator search, site and investigator summarization, shortlisting sites & sending out feasibility questionnaires to shortlisted sites

Use Case

Site Feasibility leads responsible for Site Identification & Feasibility can interact with the assistive agent using natural language to easily search for top sites & investigators relevant for a study, get summaries of the site & investigator to quickly take selection decision & then send out pre-configured feasibility questionnaires to the investigator sites

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

*Requires Agentforce LSC SKU

726 of 846

*Requires Einstein1 SKU

Customer Need

Site Feasibility leads spend a lot of time to identify and shortlist sites & investigators for clinical trials based on participant recruitment potential, site capabilities, operational efficiency and regulatory compliance

Solution / How To Configure

Users can leverage the Einstein based site & investigator summarisation on the site & investigator search result screen to take initial shortlisting decision for further site feasibility

Use Case

Site Feasibility leads responsible for Site Identification & Feasibility can take create the initial shortlist of relevant sites & investigators much faster equipped with insightful summarisation on the site & investigator search result screen

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

Clinical: Site Mgmt: Site & Investigator Summarization

Get insightful site & investigator summaries to accelerate selection process

727 of 846

Clinical: Site Mgmt: Console App

Site identification & feasibility features consolidated in single app

Customer Need

Solution / How To Configure

Users can leverage the Site management console app to centralise all their site identification and feasibility effort across multiple studies. The app home screen can be easily configured to avail the standard reports for different entities to keep track of progress

Use Case

Site Feasibility leads responsible for Site Identification & Feasibility can easily manage all tasks like site & investigator search, feasibility questionnaire creation, review of sites & investigator repository, etc. from the Site management console app

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

*Requires Einstein1 SKU

728 of 846

Clinical: Site Mgmt: �Site Data Model Objects

Leverage Data Cloud capabilities for better site and investigator selection

Customer Need

Clinical Trial Sponsors need access to the site and investigator profiles as well as past trial performance data to identify, select and activate the right investigators and sites for clinical trials.

Solution / How To Configure

Users can leverage the Site Data Model consisting of objects like Health Care Facility, Health Care Provider, Care Program Site, Party Publication, Accreditation, etc. to store site & investigator profiles and past trial performance data. All the entities are now available as Data Model Objects in Data Cloud which can help customers bring in site & investigator repository data from existing data lakes to Data Cloud to create a single source of truth and leverage the power of data cloud

Use Case

Customers can leverage Data Cloud to create Site Enrollment Prediction models, Site & Investigator segmentation to find the right site & investigator for the clinical trial

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

Reduce the %age of non-enrolling sites

729 of 846

Clinical: Site Mgmt: �Investigator & Site Search

Accelerate Investigator and Site identification for clinical trials

Customer Need

Investigator & Site Selection for a Clinical Trial is crucial to the outcome of a clinical trial; deciding success vs. failure of clinical trials. Customers need effective tools that can help them quickly identify the right investigators and sites based on multiple factors.

Solution / How To Configure

Investigator & Site Search leverages enhanced Criteria based Search and Filter capabilities and an OOTB investigator & site flat entity (searchable object). Customers can bring in their investigator/site repository data into CRM and search appropriate investigators/sites for feasibility. Using HC Unified Health Score data model customers can bring in their own site and investigator scores to be used for finding the right site. Investigator and Sites can be categorised using Interest Tags

Use Case

Site feasibility teams can search & identify investigators and sites based on the needs of a clinical trial utilising the extensive search and filter capabilities of CBSF

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

730 of 846

Clinical: Site Mgmt: Intelligent Site Feasibility

Accelerate the site feasibility process

Customer Need

Sponsor (Pharma Cos/CROs) Site feasibility teams need an effective tool to evaluate & shortlist clinical trial sites and investigator based on participant recruitment potential, site capabilities, operational efficiency and regulatory compliance

Solution / How To Configure

Intelligent Site Feasibility solution reuses Discovery Framework (DF) and Assessments for Feasibility questionnaire creation, HC AI Assessment Generation to build question library. Additionally it uses Assessment formula questions for scoring the feasibility questionnaires and response pre- fill features ensures that Investigators can leverage past responses

Use Case

Site feasibility lead can create feasibility questionnaires using DF by leveraging AI generated question library from historical questionnaires and study documents. They can set scoring logic for objective questions to automatically score Investigator Responses and use the score dashboard to prioritize specific investigators' assessments.

Impact

Improve Site feasibility lead productivity

Impact

Simplify the process of filing a complaint.

Agentforce

739 of 846

Complaints Management for Public Sector

Complaint to Case conversion

Customer Need

Assist Complaint Intake Officers to ensure they are able to resolve the issues effectively.

Solution / How To Configure

Agentforce can

Suggest & Link a Complaint to an Existing Case
Suggest and assist in creating a new case, and link the complaint to it.
Suggest Regulatory Code Violations
Suggest Relevant Evidence for Investigation

Use Case

When complaint intake officers receive complaints, they can efficiently assess and convert it into an investigation(create a new Case or link to an existing Case),

Impact

Complaints are efficiently transformed into investigations, leading to timely resolutions and improved trust in the agency's ability to address issues effectively

Agentforce

740 of 846

Common Capabilities

741 of 846

Asset Management for Public Sector

Manage and Track Assets

Customer Need

Public sector agencies need a unified system to manage the complete lifecycle of their diverse assets, from buildings for social housing to vehicles and other infrastructure

Solution / How To Configure

Track and Manage the complete lifecycle of Public Sector assets from acquisition to decommissioning, including all maintenance history and related personnel.

Use Case

A housing authority can create a detailed record for each housing unit, linking its internal appliances like HVAC systems and assigning the relevant tenants, officers, and approved vendors.

Impact

Simplified asset management for diverse Public Sector usecases.

742 of 846

External Storage of files with AWS

Seamless AWS S3 Integration for External File Storage in PSS

Customer Need

Public sector agencies need an affordable and scalable way to store and stream massive volumes of large files, like video and documents, that must be retained for long periods to meet compliance needs.

Solution / How To Configure

Provides the ability to create and manage public sector assets, tracking the complete lifecycle from acquisition to decommissioning, including all maintenance history and related personnel.

Use Case

Evidence Management is an example of an area in Public Sector which sees very high volume of video and media files of large size (petabytes), documents, other materials.

Impact

Reduce Storage Expenses
Indefinite Scalability
Unified Experience

743 of 846

Grantmaking

744 of 846

Grantmaking Data Bundle

Easily bring Grantmaking data into Data Cloud

Customer Need

Organizations face a significant challenge and cost barrier when manually mapping their Grantmaking data to Data Cloud, which can be a tedious and error-prone process.

Solution / How To Configure

Access the new guided setup experience and the pre-built data stream mappings for core Grantmaking objects under the Program Grantmaking Intelligence setup node.

Use Case

A data cloud administrator can now easily connect their Grantmaking data to Data Cloud with a guided setup and pre-configured data stream mappings allowing them to start analyzing their data for insights and personalization without extensive manual configuration.

Impact

Reduce the time and cost to get started with Data Cloud and accelerate time to value.

Public Sector Foundation - Advanced

745 of 846

Simplified Setup

746 of 846

Public Sector Foundation - Advanced

Customer Need

Admins need a simplified step by step process to setup all the required features to help create recruitment business process for recruiters, hiring managers and applicants

Solution / How To Configure

With the out of the box feature set “Hire the best talent faster” in Salesforce Go, admins can find the relevant features to setup recruitment process

Use Case

Admins can find the necessary feature pages in Salesforce Go to setup recruitment, go through the steps to enable key features, assign required licenses and add associated lightning components to the right page layouts

Impact

Improved setup experience for admins

Easy Setup for Talent Recruitment Management

Discover and setup features required for Talent Recruitment Management

747 of 846

Scratch Orgs

On-demand PSS Orgs for faster and more collaborative development

Customer Need

Developers need fast, isolated, and configurable environments to build, test, and collaborate. Unlike slower sandboxes or Developer Edition orgs, scratch orgs provide clean, on-demand setups with the right features to speed development and improve release quality.

Solution / How To Configure

Developers create scratch orgs on demand using Salesforce CLI or DevOps tools. Scratch orgs are now available for with Benefits, Provider, Recruitment and Investigative Case Management features.

Use Case

A developer creates a scratch org with Recruitment Management features, builds and tests changes, commits to version control, and runs CI tests. Once validated, the org is deleted, ensuring a clean environment for the next iteration without conflicts

Impact

Developer Productivity: Faster setup, repeatable environments, and streamlined CI/CD workflows.

748 of 846

Automotive Cloud

749 of 846

Automotive Lending Enhancements

750 of 846

Credit Bureau Data Model

OOTB Data Model to persist Bureau report information

Customer Need

Captive Lenders need to persist the customer bureau information to determine the creditworthiness of the Loan applicant and make the appropriate lending decisions while optimizing risk

Solution / How To Configure

Extension to the existing Digital Lending Data model to persist the Credit bureau information of the customer fetched from the Bureaus

Included with Digital Lending Data Model

Use Case

Fetching and persisting a credit bureau report for automotive loan decisioning is a critical step in the loan underwriting process. It helps lenders assess a borrower’s creditworthiness and risk level before approving a car loan.

Impact

Risk management
Compliance
Profitability

751 of 846

Omnichannel routing of Applications

Efficient routing of the Automotive Loan and Lease applications for faster processing

Customer Need

Captives need to intelligently route the Applications to the Agents with the required skill and capacity to efficiently manage the application processing

Solution / How To Configure

Enabled Application Form and Application Form Product for Omni Channel Routing capability.

Enable the Omnichannel settings, create Service Channel and Routing config and Presence status. Assign the Presence status to the users to process the records once assigned to them or to the queue

Use Case

Flexible and configurable routing rules to allow efficient and fast processing of automotive Loan and Lease applications

Impact

Conversion rate
Time to decision
Increased revenue
Operational efficiency

752 of 846

Automotive Finance- Service Automation

753 of 846

Service Process Templates

Prebuilt template to address Due Date Change, Loan Payoff and Loan Statement service requests

Customer Need

Captive Lenders require pre-built process templates for a quicker time to market with streamlined process intake and fulfillment

Solution / How To Configure

Activate the Due date change template in Unified Catalog. Clone and Activate the Loan payoff and Statement Omni Scripts and respective flows. Establish mulesoft connection for the external system integration

Use Case

Request intake and fulfillment supported for Employee and Customers to self serve and submit service requests

Impact

Operational efficiency
Reduced cost

754 of 846

Automotive Finance Service Agents

Agent powered assistance to Customer Service Representatives

Customer Need

CSRs struggle with manual, multi-system processes to log cases and gather customer data, leading to longer handle times and requiring specialized expertise.

Solution / How To Configure

Introduced new Service Agent topics to assist with Address change, Loan Payoff, Loan statement, View Transactions, View Balances service requests . With the capability of IP based Agent action customers can easily customize & configure actions.

Use Case

Request intake and fulfillment supported for Employee to submit service requests such as Address change, Loan payoff statement etc..

Impact

Helps front-office employees manage their tasks efficiently, providing contextual guidance, reducing average handle time, reducing research time and improving workflow accuracy.

755 of 846

Collections & Recovery

756 of 846

Hardship Management �& Loan Restructuring

Guiding Borrowers Towards Repayment Solutions

Customer Need

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

A customer unable to pay their credit card bill due to reduced income requests a 6-month restructuring plan w/ smaller installments is captured and routed for manager approval

Impact

Improves recovery rates while preserving customer relationships through tailored repayment options.

757 of 846

Collections 360

Customer Need

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

Impact

758 of 846

Customer Need

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

Impact

Optimizes resource deployment, enhancing recovery rates from high-risk accounts and improving overall operational efficiency in the collections process.

Predictive AI Model for Collections Risk Assessment

An OOTB model to identify high priority collection cases

759 of 846

Connected Vehicles/Assets

760 of 846

Customer Need

Organizations need a way to holistically manage telemetry definitions and create remote actions easily for assets and vehicles

Solution / How To Configure

Use telemetry definitions for standardizing telemetry data used for remote actions
Declaratively create remote/telemetry actions; this results in generation of intake UI and underlying fulfillment process automatically

Use Case

Standardizing telemetry definitions and create telemetry actions such as lock door/unlock door on the connected vehicle from CRM as needed

Impact

Operational efficiency
Reduced cost

Telemetry Definition �and Action Management

Standardize telemetry definitions and declaratively create telemetry actions

761 of 846

Automotive Foundation Enhancements

762 of 846

Customer Need

Assets/vehicle requires granular sharing as only the active owner/dealer can see details of assets/vehicles they own.

Solution / How To Configure

Asset data sharing participant and Complaint data sharing help users to flexibly share assets and vehicles

Use Case

Control access to assets/vehicles based on participant role such as owner, and dealer

Impact

Operational efficiency
Improved compliance
Reduced cost

Enhanced Asset/Vehicle Data Sharing

Enhanced sharing of vehicles/assets with internal and external users flexibly using asset data sharing participant entity

763 of 846

VIN Validation Relaxation

Older vehicles do not follow VIN standards and hence need ability to include older vehicles that were manufactured before VIN’s were introduced

Customer Need

Older vehicles that were manufactured before VIN standard do not comply with VIN standard and hence validations need to be relaxed

Solution / How To Configure

VIN field does not have any data validations, customers can add data validations as needed

Use Case

Supporting old vehicles in Automotive cloud

Impact

Enhanced implementation flexibility with support for old vehicles

764 of 846

Customer Need

Manage customer disclosures and consents effectively and view disclosures and consents on the vehicles

Solution / How To Configure

Enable disclosures and consent management, define disclosure and consents as needed. Create RL’s on vehicles to view the related disclosures and consents

Use Case

Viewing related disclosures and consents for a vehicles for use cases such as telematics data collection

Impact

Improved legal compliances and customer trust

Related List Support for Disclosure and Consent Management for Vehicles

Disclosure and consents can be defined and managed for vehicle. This enhancement allows users to view disclosures and consent as related list for vehicles

765 of 846

Customer Need

Model multiple versions of a product with in a single year

Solution / How To Configure

Model Year Version is available as an optional field on product2 entity

Use Case

Effectively model and manage multiple versions of a product such as 2025.2 for a vehicle model

Impact

Improved product management

Enhanced Product Management with Model Year Version Support

Model year support enables organizations to plan and support versions with in a model year thereby enabling granular management

766 of 846

Kanban Support for Vehicles and Fleets

Kanban view provides a visual and interactive way to manage records and tracking through different stages. Vehicle and Fleet entities are enhanced to support Kanban view

Customer Need

Visually and interactively manage vehicles and fleets

Solution / How To Configure

Kanban view is enabled for Vehicles and fleets

Use Case

Manage vehicles and interactively manage vehicles by status

Impact

Enhanced vehicle and fleet management

767 of 846

Customer Need

Dealers need the ability to access and conduct trade-in appraisals in the partner community.

Solution / How To Configure

Use the OOTB Omni flexcards and script to initiate the Appraisal flow from a Lead or an Opportunity record page to capture the Appraisal details. Use the OOTB omni based flow from the Appraisal Record Page to capture the vehicle details. The data model as well as omni based cards are now available on experience cloud.

Use Case

Ability to capture and process the trade-in or valuation interest of the vehicle in a guided manner on experience cloud.

Impact

Operational Efficiency
Employee Productivity

Forecasting, Program based business and Sales Agreement Enhancements

775 of 846

Customer Need

Ability to perform multiple updates to Forecasts metrics at a given time.

Solution / How To Configure

Planners can now use the new datable to make edits to forecasts. Data table includes features

Freeze Columns and row header
Ability to have trail history
Ability to have text wrap for columns(resize columns), including Scrolling
Navigation to the group of cells, through keyboard tabs
Ability to Undo Changes

Use Case

As an Account Manager, I would like to create, update forecasting records in very easy manner. Today it’s not possible to use the Manufacturing Cloud Forecasting as it takes me 5 -8 hrs to enter simple monthly forecasting data

Impact

Improved Efficiency for Account Managers which accelerates adoption of Manufacturing Cloud

Intuitive Spreadsheet-Like Experience for Advanced Account Forecasting

Accelerate Sales Manager productivity with user-friendly forecasting sheets.

Partner Lead Management

780 of 846

Customer Need

AgentForce: Inventory Management

Monitor and maintain optimum inventory levels

Customer Need

Assist OEMs and dealer organizations in more effectively monitoring inventory levels and seamlessly managing various inventory-related tasks.

Solution / How To Configure

Use Case

Summarize stock levels and initiate replenishment through product requests, leveraging LLM-based intelligence to recommend optimal source locations and quantities.

Impact

Employee Productivity

Agentforce

785 of 846

Communications Cloud

786 of 846

Industries CPQ

787 of 846

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Customer Need

Sales teams need to flexibly manage pricing for individual line items in quotes, applying specific price adjustments or overrides to create tailored offers.

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Standard Cart APIs from CMT Admin and enable the “Standard Cart API’s available with Winter’26” toggle to enable the ApplyAdjustment API.

Use Case

A sales rep needs to give a customer a 10% discount on a single product. Using the applyAdjustment API, they can apply this discount to that specific line item without affecting the pricing of other products in the quote.

Impact

Improved Sales rep productivity with faster quote generation

Support for Apply Adjustments with Standard Cart API

Enhancing CPQ API Performance for Apply Adjustments API

788 of 846

Agentforce for Communications Cloud

789 of 846

Agentforce for Quote Recipients Grouping

Easily create/update as well as suggest groups based on specified criteria

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Customer Need

Sales representatives need a more efficient method than manually selecting individual recipients to create groups when configuring quotes. The manual process is cumbersome, especially when the same offer needs to be applied to multiple recipients, hindering scalability and performance.

Solution

Provides ability to automate the creation of recipient groups for quotes which allows sales reps to configure an offer once and apply it to a group. It also provides group suggestions based on specified criteria.

Use Case / Agent Actions

Create Quote Recipient Groups: Creates groups for quote recipients.
Get Group Suggestions: Gets a list of group suggestions for quote recipients based on a criteria.
Get Quote Location Count: Gets the number of locations associated with a quote.
Get Quote Location Fields: Gets the list of location fields to create a recipient group.
Get Recipient Grouping Criteria: Gets the list of grouping criteria for the recipients of a quote.
Update Quote Recipient Group Name: Updates the name of a quote recipient group

Impact

Improves efficiency, usability, and performance for sales reps by reducing the manual tasks involved in quoting.

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Agentforce

790 of 846

Customer Need

Service representatives need an efficient way to handle customer queries about service degradation. They require quick analysis of whether service level objectives (SLOs) are being met by comparing them against the customer's network usage data.

Solution

Using AI-powered "digital labor" within Agentforce, automatically analyze and provide insights on SLO compliance by fetching data from Data Cloud. This empowers service reps to quickly understand and address issues related to service degradation.

Use Case / Agent Actions

Involves a service representative receiving a query from a customer about poor service. The rep uses the this feature to help provide insights and resolve the query.

The primary action involved is:

Get Service Level Objective Insights For Asset: Handles the analysis of the service level objectives for an asset. The analysis is based on comparing the service level objective compliance criteria against the network usage data.

As part of the analysis, it provides when and how often SLO thresholds were breached, calculates the non-compliant intervals, and determines the percentage of time the asset underperformed.

Impact

Improved efficiency for service representatives by automating the analysis of complex service and network data.

Agentforce for Service Level Objective Insights

Provide SLO compliance insights to help maintain service quality

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Agentforce

791 of 846

Customer Need

Customers can now create agentic flows & actions in Agentforce to perform essential cart operations using out-of-the-box Industries CPQ Invocable Actions.�Sales reps can now perform the much / often required “tailored” custom workflows for their sales journeys, removing the need to launch complex sales apps for simple sales processes, as defined by their business by leveraging the power of agentic flows during additional quote & order capture processes.

�Solution / Invocable Actions & Flows

These additional invocable actions as well as flows are being delivered in Winter ‘26. �Invocable Actions:

Delete Line Items from Cart
Get Assets of an Account
Get Promotions for Cart
Apply Promotions to Cart�

Flows:

Get Offers for Asset
Replace Offer in Cart
Delete or Disconnect Line Item from Cart

�Use them to perform essential cart operations, such as deleting quote line items, getting assets, applying promotions as well as change of plan�

Example Use Cases

Delete Line Items: Delete a line item from a quote or an order based on specified inputs
Get Assets For Account: Get a list of assets that are available for a particular account
Promotion discovery and application: A sales rep can now use Agentforce to get available promotions and apply them.
Upgrade/Change Plan: A sales rep can use Agentforcer to perform a plan upgrade by looking up options and then going with the upgrade.

Enterprise Sales Management

797 of 846

Role-Based Access Control for ESM features

Configure role-specific permissions to optimize enterprise quoting workflows and user efficiency

Customer Need

Sales Managers require granular control over user permissions to match the unique responsibilities of their team members. They need a way to assign specific features rights to view, edit, or delete data within the ESM application. This will prevent unauthorized actions and streamline the interface for each team member by disabling features not pertinent to their role.

Solution / How To Configure

Configuration begins by enabling an org-level flag to activate the permissions system within the ESM app. Once enabled, admins need to create custom permission sets, each defining required feature access rights. These sets should be then assigned to user profiles to tailor each user's access.

Note: This control is only for UI elements and does not consider API permissions

Use Case

Sales Manager needs to provide controlled access to the entire team while a Sales Representative need to only see and modify their own assigned actions/features. For example, the admins creates a custom permission "Manage Discounts" with access to create and apply discounts in ESM which is assigned to right sales group.

Impact

Controlled access with focused usability, streamlined workflows

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

798 of 846

Decoupled Validation & Pricing

Separate validation from pricing to significantly improve response time during ‘real-time’ attribute updates in ESM working cart

Customer Need

Sales representative configuring complex B2B products in the ESM working cart, need more control over pricing calculations. They want to be able to get immediate validation feedback on attribute updates while deferring the slow pricing calculation, so that they can efficiently complete configurations without experiencing delays.

Solution / How To Configure�A default pricing & validation mode ('Real-time' or ‘On-demand’) can be set at the org level. In the ESM working cart, user can override this default with a simple toggle. In 'Real time validation' mode, only attribute validations are instant, and pricing is run manually.

Note: This feature requires the standard cart APIs to be enabled.

Use Case

The sales representatives enables only ‘real time validations' and ‘deferred pricing' mode to rapidly configure a product with many attributes. Once all attribute configuration rules are passed and the cart is validated, he manually triggers pricing to see the final calculations.

Impact

Faster attribute updates, Reduced loading times & Flexible validation control

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Bulk Edit Control

A new organization-level setting to enable or disable bulk editing on summary tab

Customer Need

The admins need centralized control over data modification features like bulk editing. They want the ability to enable/disable the ‘Bulk Edit’ feature at the org level to prevent accidental, large-scale errors by sales representatives. This control is crucial for maintaining data integrity.

Solution / How To Configure

This feature is controlled by a configuration flag within the b2bSampleAppCard settings. To manage the access, set the flag to true which enables the bulk edit access on the summary tab, or set it to false which will disable it for all users.

Use Case

The admin wants to be careful with its customer information and prevent accidental edits by sales representatives. To avoid this risk, he turns OFF the bulk edit feature for all.

Impact

Centralized Administrative Control, Enhanced Data Integrity, Improved data governance

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

803 of 846

Batch Sub-Order Creation

Configure the system to process sub-orders in batches for a significant performance improvement on complex quotes

Customer Need

The traditional method of creating sub-orders ‘one at a time’ is a slower process that may cause delays to the entire order finalization process typically for complex, high-volume quotes. Users require an efficient, automated solution that can process these sub-orders in bulk so that the large deals can be finalized faster.

Solution / How To Configure

Activate "Enable Batch Creation of Sub-Orders" flag in the CPQ Configuration Setup. This enables the batch processing of all sub-orders asynchronously. Additionally, set the batch size limit “ESMBatchSizeForCreateSubOrders” which determines the number of sub-orders that will be processed together during conversion. The ideal threshold will vary depending on the org’s quote complexity and usage of quote member groups.

Use Case

A Sales representative needs to convert a large, time-sensitive enterprise quote with hundreds of line items into a final order. This feature allows them to complete this action faster as compared to the traditional process, triggering the creation of all necessary sub-orders in efficient background batches.

Impact

Performance Improvement, Improved Business Scalability, Enhanced User Experience & Adoption

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

804 of 846

Custom Discount Defaults

Preset the values for ‘name’ & ‘allocation type’ when creating new custom discounts

Customer Need

Sales representatives who frequently creates similar types of discounts need a way to pre-define common discount details like the name and allocation type to reduce repetitive data entry and create custom discounts more efficiently.

Solution / How To Configure

To set the default custom discount fields, find the “customDiscountDefaultName” parameter within the b2bSampleAppCard settings and enter the desired values.

Use Case

A sales representative is creating a "Monsoon Sale" discount and need to apply it on multiple enterprise quotes. Instead of manually typing "Monsoon Sale" and selecting the allocation type as ‘order’ each time, he sets these as the default parameters in the configuration. Now, every time he creates a new custom discount, the name & allocation type is populated, saving him from repetitive data entry.

Impact

Enhanced Consistency and Accuracy, reduced manual efforts, Accelerated custom discount creation

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

805 of 846

Usability improvements

Effortless Attribute Selection in the working cart & more compact Search on product catalog page

Customer Need

ESM users need a more efficient platform experience. They need to instantly locate specific options within complex attribute picklists while working on product configurations. And a modern interface without visual clutter to search for ‘products & promotions’ in the product catalog page.

Solution / How To Configure

Both options are enabled by default, no configuration is required.

Use Case

A sales representative uses the streamlined, icon-driven search bar to quickly find a specific product or promotion. In the working cart, when configuring a picklist attribute, he bypasses scrolling by typing the first few letters. This instantly filters the list, enabling him to select the correct option in seconds.

Impact

Enhanced User Experience, Modernized and Scalable Interface

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

806 of 846

ASLM Enhancements

807 of 846

Technician Upsell

Empower Technicians & Service Agents to upsell with ease

Customer Need

Field Technicians (as well as Service agents) often have opportunities to upsell products, by observation or through customer enquiries. However, this usually results in just an opportunity being created, leading to missed opportunities and lower customer satisfaction.

Solution

Leverage Agentforce, on SFS Mobile App (or Service Console), to provide an intuitive feature that empowers them to effortlessly discover upsell opportunities for customers. This involves benefits comparisons, pricing details, and other relevant information, enabling technicians/agents to seamlessly generate quotes for the customer.

Use Case

The upsell covers scenarios such as

Discovering an alternate product to Customer’s existing product
Discovering optional products e.g. add ons/accessories that are available with the currently existing asset’s product

Impact

Maximize revenue opportunities.
Simple & intuitive allowing non-sales-savvy technicians/service agents to deliver personalized and informed quotes.
Enables effortless identification and capitalization on upsell opportunities
Elevates the overall customer experience.

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

Pilot

808 of 846

Communications Cloud Sales in Core

809 of 846

Split Quotes into Multiple Orders

Split Quote into multiple Orders according to selected Criteria

Customer Need

After the Quoting Process for all Sites have concluded, Sales Representatives need to be able to split the Quote by relevant criteria so the technical team can work on the enrichment of specific Orders and Order line items.

Solution / How To Configure

From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Revenue Cloud, and select Revenue Settings.
Turn on Advanced Order Creation From Quote.
Select Communications: Create Orders from Quote
Create a Quote and Select Create Orders

Use Case

Sales Representatives working in a Quote with multiple Locations can create Site Based Orders so they can be enriched and submitted according their priority.
Sales Representatives can create Groups of Locations to quote for same product/s and apply same configuration and now they can also create one Order containing all the products associated with the sites belonging to the Group.
Sales representative can split orders by any field such as Product, installation date, billing account, etc.

Impact

Improve Sales Representative Efficiency

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

810 of 846

Empty Groups

Create Groups without adding Recipients

Customer Need

Sales Representative need to quote and apply same configuration to a quantity of sites while not having the specific/full list

Solution / How To Configure

Create a Group and specify Group name and expected quantity of Locations

Use Case

Sales Representatives can now quickly create Budgetary quotes while customers provide full list of Locations/Sites

Sales Representatives can update this quantity any time in Groups that can contain a combination of real locations and expected count.

Impact

Quote enhanced management and Scalability

Unlimited and Enterprise Editions

811 of 846

Loyalty Management

812 of 846

Loyalty Management: Agents

Onboard Loyalty Management in Agentforce

Customer Need

Enable Gen AI features to convert conversational inputs from user to Loyalty actions

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Einstein AI Platform
Enable Agent topics for Loyalty

Use Case

Create or Update Promotion across BuyX templates
Create Promotion Email for SpendX, BuyX template

Impact

Improve Productivity for Loyalty/ Marketing Admins

Agentforce

813 of 846

Customer Need

Enable Gen AI features to convert conversational inputs from user to Loyalty actions and insights

Solution / How To Configure

Enable Einstein AI Platform
Enable Agent topics for Loyalty

Use Case

Create or Update Promotion across Combos templates
Create or Update Promotion across Engagement Trail templates
Respond intelligently to inquiries on Promotion Performance with Insights agents

Impact

Improve Productivity for Loyalty/ Marketing Admins

Loyalty Management: Agents

Onboard Loyalty Management in Agentforce

Agentforce

Pilot

814 of 846

Growth, Advanced

Customer Need

Marketers/ Program Admins need to configure different program and promotion rules. The users want to quickly view the summary of different steps and easily configure new steps to the rule.

Solution / How To Configure

Quickly view the summary of different steps in the process Rule
Quickly configure the Process Rule by selecting a step from the reorganized list of rule conditions or actions

Use Case

Clearly differentiate different rule steps with visual enhancements (color pills and icons)
Offer intuitive rule step summary for business users
Easily understand the Process rule configuration with the intuitive design

Impact

Improve user experience and productivity for Marketers and Program Admins

Loyalty Management: �Rule Engine Enhancements

Visual enhancements to intuitively manage Loyalty process rules

815 of 846

Growth, Advanced

Customer Need

Define prioritization rules and apply the most relevant promotions to a customer's cart when multiple offers are eligible

Solution / How To Configure

Configure evaluation criteria against line, cross-line and order level promotions groups.
Use promotion-execution API to adjudicate promotions.
Get details of the promotions to be applied, discount values by promotion and recommended final price for the line items and cart

Use Case

Configure how promotions in each group should be applied
Use Stacked evaluation to apply all the eligible promotions on the cart.
Choose “First promotion” or “Highest promotion” to apply only promotion per cart or per item from the sub-group giving preference to highest priority promotion or the promotion giving highest reward to the user

Impact

Optimize profitability and enhance customer experience

Global Promotions: Promotion Evaluation and Execution

Orchestrate promotions to provide the best value to customers

816 of 846

Salesforce Go for Global Promotions

Setup GPM with a single click

Customer Need

IT Admins need an easy and quick way to checkout all the features offered by GPM and set them up.

Solution / How To Configure

Navigate to the Setup > Salesforce Go > Global Promotion Management section and setup GPM with a single click.

Use Case

IT Administrators and Marketers can now quickly enable and configure promotions on their Org without going through the help documentation.

Impact

Simplified setup so that IT Admins now can quickly setup the prerequisites for enabling Global Promotions

Growth, Advanced

817 of 846

Media Cloud

818 of 846

Agent: Ad Proposal Agent

Create reliable media proposals and speed up deal closure with Agentforce

Unlimited,Enterprise, Performance

Editions

Customer Need

Advertising media sellers need a quick and efficient way of creating proposals

Solution / How To Configure

Set up Einstein Generative AI and Agentforce to get access to the generative AI features and assets provided with Agentforce for Media. Configure agents that assist your sales and service teams in optimizing their tasks. Provide users access to work with agents.

Use Case

The topic comes with Agentforce actions that find products based on criteria provided by the user, create new/update existing opportunity, create a proposal with product line items and allow used to create a pitch deck.

Impact

Sales reps and media planners can now respond to request for proposals (RFP) in record time

Only available in Unlimited, Enterprise Edition. Requires Media Cloud Advanced

Beta

819 of 846

Revenue Schedules

Accurate, real-time revenue pacing and visibility within Salesforce Opportunity

Unlimited,Enterprise, Performance

Editions

Customer Need

Media sellers and finance teams need accurate, real-time visibility of expected versus actual revenue directly on Opportunities to prevent revenue leakage and reduce manual reconciliation.

Solution / How To Configure

Revenue schedules are configured on the Opportunity using LWC component with predefined calendar types (broadcast or Gregorian) and split methods (equal, daily proration). Then, Planned, actual, and adjusted revenue enable easy comparison and pacing view.

Use Case

Sales and finance teams can quickly identify under-delivery, track revenue performance by seller, and take corrective action early, all without exporting to spreadsheets or switching systems.

Impact

Improves revenue accuracy, streamlines reconciliation, and ensures sales, operations, and finance are aligned—reducing manual effort and operational errors.

820 of 846

PM: Goutham Kandregula

Link to Org62 SO Submission Record

Ad Sales Management

821 of 846

Advertising Inventory Management

Provide precise,real-time insights into ad inventory through a centralized calendar view

Unlimited,Enterprise, Performance

Editions

Customer Need

Media networks need a unified system to manage advertising inventory across various channels like websites, stores, newsletters etc

Solution / How To Configure

The grid is based on industries datagrid component and can be modified by setting up templates for different product families

Custom actions can be setup and configured using flows

Use Case

Sales/Ad ops teams need an integrated solution that offers dynamic inventory management, seamless reservation and booking workflows, and a unified calendar view.

Impact

Plug in revenue leakage by avoiding double-bookings, conflicts and improve campaign serviceability

Only available in Unlimited, Enterprise, PxE Edition. Requires Media Cloud Growth or Advanced

822 of 846

Advertising Inventory Management

Perform and manage inventory lifecycle across different ad products

Unlimited,Enterprise, Performance

Editions

Only available in Unlimited, Enterprise, PxE Edition. Requires Media Cloud Growth or Advanced

Customer Need

Media networks need a unified system to manage advertising inventory across various channels like websites, stores, newsletters etc

Solution / How To Configure

Admins can setup custom actions as per business needs and drive the outcomes using flows

Use Case

Account executives and sales teams can pitch, reserve, and cancel inventory slots with confidence

Impact

Plug in revenue leakage by avoiding double-bookings, conflicts and improve campaign serviceability

823 of 846

Advertising Inventory Management

Single pane of glass for different demand points and their stages

Unlimited,Enterprise, Performance

Editions

Customer Need

Advertising media sellers need a unified, streamlined, and automated quote-to-cash process specifically designed for media sales.

Solution / How To Configure

Different inventory statuses can be configured via config entity and status transitions can be managed via ootb or custom flows

Use Case

Sales/Ad ops teams need visibility into competing demand before pitching/reservation or booking the appropriate inventory

Impact

Plug in revenue leakage by avoiding double-bookings, conflicts and improve campaign serviceability

Only available in Unlimited, Enterprise Edition. Requires Media Cloud Advanced

824 of 846

Referral Marketing

825 of 846

Referral Marketing - MC Next Integration

Marketing Cloud integration for automated content distribution

Customer Need

Engage referral participants (brand advocates and the friends they refer) throughout the referral process - sending the referral codes, nudging them at different stages of the process and communicating the rewards earned

Solution / How To Configure

Seamlessly create campaigns, flows and distribution content on Marketing Cloud from Referral Promotions
Make use of pre-built email templates and flows to activate the referral promotions and communicate with the referral participants
Add referral and reward related content to the distribution emails and tailor communication based on the referral stage and rewards

Use Case

MC Integration enables Marketers to

Select the referral promotion stage for content distribution
Use OOB email templates to auto generate distribution flows and
Personalize the content based on audience, stage and rewards

Impact

Increase referrals and referral conversion rates by engaging the referral participants

Referral Marketing and Marketing Cloud

826 of 846

B2B Referral Management

Customer Need

Channel and Sales Managers want to drive lead generation for new customer acquisition and new opportunities through channel partner referrals and their existing customers

Solution / How To Configure

Use guided setup to quickly configure the B2B referral program - Referral Promotion, Eligibility and Rewards
Extend the b2b sales processes (with leads and opportunities) to b2b referral lifecycle by configuring referral processes (using Flows, Data Processing Engine and Batch Management)
Use Spotlight with frequent actions to manage ongoing activities

Use Case

Enable partners and customers to easily refer valuable leads and opportunities through referral programs
Create diverse rewards like payouts, commissions and discount vouchers
Enable seamless submission, monitoring, and status updates for the referrals

Use Case

Customers want to calculate their business travel emissions for taxis or rideshares or rail via distance information available with them.

Solution

Customer can enter the distance traveled information to calculate emissions on ground travel energy use records. If both distance and cost are provided, prioritize calculating emissions by using distance. These emissions are mapped to Scope 3 - Business Travel.

Impact

Improve Carbon accounting in NZC and compliance to GHG protocol

NZC Starter

833 of 846

Negative Distance adjustment for Vehicles

(Carbon Accounting Enhancement)

Customer Need

Today, Vehicle Asset Energy Use does not accept negative numbers on the Distance field. Customers need a solution where negative distance is mostly a correction/adjustment, mostly when their drivers correct for keyed in errors of odometer readings made at the fuel stations.

(We support negative numbers in Fuel Consumption field which accurately rolls up to Carbon Footprint (CF) and Annual Emissions Inventory (AEI))

Solution

Post 258, Net Zero Cloud supports negative fleet distance adjustment on the vehicle asset energy use records, and will also calculate negative emissions and roll up accordingly in Carbon Footprint and Annual Emissions Inventory entities.

Use Case

Sustainability managers will be able to correct energy use records that cannot be corrected at source.

Impact

This change will ensure more accurate carbon accounting for Net Zero Cloud customers, and also ensures greater product parity with the fuel consumption field. Also helps with retention for Novo Nordisk.

834 of 846

Custom Fuel support for Private jet and Waste

(Carbon Accounting Enhancement)

Customer Need

Today for vehicle asset energy use records, if the record type is Private Jet, the only fuel type allowed is Jet Fuel. Custom fuels don't work for private jets. Also customers need flexibility to add more UOMs for generated waste; more specifically, they are looking for cubic meters for solid waste and liters for used waste/oil.

Solution

Customers want to use custom fuels for Private jets. They also want to use custom unit of measures for capturing waste disposed.

Use Case

Customers can now create custom fuels such as Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF) or custom waste units such as cubic meters, to capture consumption or in Vehicle asset energy use or waste in Generated waste respt. and calculate emissions for them.

Impact

Companies like Google etc. will be able to load energy uses for private jets that do not use jet fuel but use Sustainable Aviation Fuel (SAF). With additional UOMs customer will be able to report their waste generated more easily and accurately.

835 of 846

Scope Allocation on Energy Use

(Carbon Accounting Enhancement)

Customer Need

Today the scope allocation happens at the asset level where all energy uses associated to the asset get the same scope allocation. Customers/partners needed a way to override the scope allocation at the energy use level Eg:: Penske has millions of trucks worldwide which are owned but often leased to customers (Scope 3, cat 13). For the same asset, scope allocation can be different in different situations.

Use Case

Customers want to override scope allocation for stationary, vehicle and waste at the energy use or generated waste level.

Solution

Carbon Scope Allocation field added to stationary asset energy use, vehicle asset energy use and generated waste records so that customers can override the scope allocation.

Impact

Companies will be able to report their stationary and vehicle emissions along with generated waste emissions more accurately by being able to override emissions scope allocation at the energy use level instead of the asset level.

836 of 846

Energy & Utilities Cloud

837 of 846

Tariff Comparison

Recommend and Enroll best fit Tariffs

Customer Need

Sales and service agents face delays while suggesting eligible product’s during discussions. It’s hard to quickly provide accurate quotes based on customer data, leading to missed sales opportunities and suggesting a better product to end customer

Solution / How To Configure

A simple selling journey for Service/Sales Agent to support the following use case:

A refined list of eligible products, fully priced,�based on Customer data

Use Case

Sales Agent, need to efficiently recognize and seize sales opportunities during customer interactions. They require tools to recommend personalized plans, explain tariff details and add-ons, all while delivering exceptional service.

Impact

Increase in Sales Opportunities

Unlimited

Enterprise Editions

838 of 846

Omnistudio

839 of 846

Omnistudio �on LWR Sites

840 of 846

Omnistudio on LWR Sites

Use Omniscripts and Flexcards within LWR Sites

Customer Need

LWR Site customers need a way to build guided interactions and dynamic UI cards on their sites. They require Omniscripts and Flexcards to be directly usable on their sites, enabling them to create rich, interactive portals that are performant and scalable.

Solution / How To Configure

Simply drag your existing or newly created Omniscripts and Flexcards when building LWR sites. This feature is only available for the customers on Omnistudio standard runtime

Use Case

Embed guided interactions onto high-performance LWR sites to streamline complex user journeys like onboarding or service requests. This combination delivers a fast, seamless experience that boosts completion rates.�

Impact

30%** faster loading of guided interaction for community users.

**Numbers based on average of internal performance test results on medium and large sized Omnistudio components. Actual results may vary

Beta

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

841 of 846

Enhanced Runtime Performance

842 of 846

Enhanced Runtime Performance

Faster load times for interactions on Standard Runtime

Customer Need

Customers need faster component performance when using enterprise grade products

Solution / How To Configure

Enable new "Enhanced Runtime Performance" toggle in Omnistudio Settings. It utilizes “efficient and secure in-platform APIs” instead of “Apex” to boost speed and ensure operations that honours user’s access. Test in a sandbox first�

Use Case

Streamline a multi-step new customer onboarding process on a public website, ensuring a fast, responsive experience that reduces drop-off and improves conversion rates.�

Impact

35%** faster loading of guided interaction across pages

**Numbers based on average of internal performance test results on medium and large sized Omnistudio components. Actual results may vary

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

843 of 846

Removal of Package Dependencies

844 of 846

Embed flexcard inside LWC

No dependency on Package-new component syntax

Customer Need

Customers want Flexcard directly in their own custom Lightning Web Components, even when they’re not using Omnistudio package

Solution / How To Configure

The change in component syntax is as follows:

Earlier: <omnistudio-flex-card-standard-runtime-wrapper flexcard-name=“Contentsite”>

Now: <lightning-omnistudio-flexcard flexcard-name="Contentsite">

Use Case

New standard component enables FlexCards in custom LWCs without the OmniStudio package, ensuring smooth transition to core.This custom LWC can be placed inside the record page

Impact

OmniStudio is now native in Salesforce Core, reducing maintenance and removing package dependency.

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

845 of 846

Embed omniscript inside LWC

No dependency on Package-new component syntax

Customer Need

Customers want Omniscript directly in their own custom Lightning Web Components, even when they’re not using Omnistudio package

Solution / How To Configure

The change in component syntax is as follows:

Earlier: <omnistudio-omnistudio-standard-runtime-wrapper>

Now: <lightning-omnistudio-omniscript>

Use Case

New standard component enables Omniscript in custom LWCs without the OmniStudio package, ensuring smooth transition to core.This custom LWC can be placed inside the record page�

Impact

OmniStudio is now native in Salesforce Core, reducing maintenance and removing package dependency.

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.

846 of 846

PubSub Suport

No dependency on Package-new component syntax

Customer Need

Customers need PubSub support so that Flexcards and Omniscripts can seamlessly communicate and share data within Salesforce pages

Solution / How To Configure

The change in component syntax is as follows:

Earlier: vlocity_ins/pubsub

Now: lightning/omnistudioPubsub

Use Case

With PubSub, selecting an Account in one FlexCard instantly updates another FlexCard to show its related Contacts without INS/CME/OS package�

Impact

OmniStudio is now native in Salesforce Core, reducing maintenance and removing package dependency.

*IMPORTANT* Guidelines for this customer-facing slide.

Ensure all your content fits on this slide and your text size, font, color, alignment, spacing all matches this slide. The format is strict to make the information more consumable across all of Salesforce. Stick to the given sections and sizing. Squeezing in more text will add more work to trim it down later.

Slide Title: Font: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 24, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.9
Sub-title: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size 17, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 0.95
Header: Font: Salesforce Sans Bold, Font Size: 13, Text Colour: #032D60, Line Spacing: 1.05
Body: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: Dark Gray 4, Line Spacing: 1.05
Footer: Font: Salesforce Sans, Font Size: 10, Text Colour: #59575C, Line Spacing: 0.9
Pill: Avant Garde SFDC, Font Size: 14, Text Colour: White, Line Spacing: 0.9, Pill Colour: #032D60

Please ensure anything included on this slide is externally shareable

Do not use celebrity names in screenshots
Remove internal only info from each section

Impact should represent impact for the customer, not Salesforce (I.e. do NOT include “Saves customer from attrition”, “greater customer adoption”, “less red accounts and salesforce-easy”) Examples of customer-facing impacts are: Sales rep productivity, Admin efficiency, improved forecast accuracy
Customer Need should not have any internal speak (I.e. “we close out _ VOC or ideaexchange points”). (Though instead you could write “Addresses one of the top ideas on IdeaExchange!”)

Please fill out each section in this template and keep in mind the audience is the customer.
Use commas instead of bullet points to conserve space.
Please include high quality screenshots but no GIFs or videos. These are awesome to show off features but does not work well in a 400+ slide deck. To minimize technical issues, please use high quality screenshots only for this deck.
Images and paragraph alignment - under View → Guides → “Show Guides” - make sure text:image ratio is 50/50 of the page like this example, and they all fit within borders of the slides
Place your callouts (edition only, licenses required, etc.) in the correct places - use the "pills" in the upper right of the slide for license or edition requirements. Delete these sections if the feature is available for all editions and doesn’t require any call-outs.
Double check for any spelling or grammatical errors, as well as acronym/abbreviations (I.e. change “etc.” to “, and more.”, change “like” to “such as”)
Eliminate acronyms and internal language (wrt, OOTB, &, ACV, VOC etc.)
Have a Pilot or Beta feature? Feel free to use the Feature Overview Slide Template to share information about Pilot and Beta features. This makes it easier to update the Solution Overview when the feature becomes Generally Available (GA). Don't worry if you don't have information for all sections—just share what you do know! To identify Pilot and Beta Feature Overview Slides, please:

Update the pill text to “Pilot” or “Beta”.
Change the pill color to #DD7A01, close to dark yellow 2.

Be sure to delete instructions in red text and in the red box on this slide.